Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 162

SENR6059-07

February 2001

Systems Operation
Testing and Adjusting
Vital Information Management
System (VIMS)
9YF1-Up (Machine)
7TJ1-Up (Machine)
5RK1-Up (Machine)
6HK1-Up (Machine)
7EK1-Up (Machine)
1HL1-Up (Machine)
5ZL1-Up (Machine)
7LL1-Up (Machine)
4AR1-Up (Machine)
7HR1-Up (Machine)
4CS1-Up (Machine)
1HW1-Up (Machine)
2BW1-302 (Machine)
3TZ1-Up (Machine)
4GZ1-Up (Machine)

i01097883

Important Safety Information


Most accidents that involve product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to
observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially
hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This
person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly.
Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and
could result in injury or death.
Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have
read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information.
Safety precautions and warnings are provided in this manual and on the product. If these hazard
warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or to other persons.
The hazards are identified by the Safety Alert Symbol and followed by a Signal Word such as
DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION. The Safety Alert WARNING label is shown below.

The meaning of this safety alert symbol is as follows:


Attention! Become Alert! Your Safety is Involved.
The message that appears under the warning explains the hazard and can be either written or
pictorially presented.
Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in
this publication.
Caterpillar cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The
warnings in this publication and on the product are, therefore, not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure,
work method or operating technique that is not specifically recommended by Caterpillar is used,
you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and for others. You should also ensure that the
product will not be damaged or be made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or
repair procedures that you choose.
The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information that
was available at the time that the publication was written. The specifications, torques, pressures,
measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can
affect the service that is given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before
you start any job. Caterpillar dealers have the most current information available. For a list of the most
current publication form numbers available, see the Service Manual Contents Microfiche, REG1139F.

When replacement parts are required for this


product Caterpillar recommends using Caterpillar replacement parts or parts with equivalent
specifications including, but not limited to, physical dimensions, type, strength and material.
Failure to heed this warning can lead to premature failures, product damage, personal injury or
death.

3
Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Systems Operation Section
General Information ................................................ 9
VIMS History ......................................................... 16
Normal Operation ................................................. 18
Service Operations ............................................... 19
Attachment Code - Configure ............................... 20
Calibration Mode - Enter ....................................... 21
Data Logger - Reset ............................................. 21
Data Logger - Start/Stop ....................................... 22
Display Backlighting - Set ..................................... 22
Display Contrast - Set ........................................... 23
Display Language - Set ........................................ 23
Display Units - Set ................................................ 23
Event - Configure .................................................. 23
Event Acknowledged - Show ................................ 25
Event List - Show .................................................. 25
Event Recorder - Start .......................................... 26
Event Statistics - Show ......................................... 27
Lubrication Interval - Set ....................................... 27
Lubrication Manual - Start .................................... 28
Machine Status - Show ......................................... 28
Odometer - Set ..................................................... 29
Resettable Totals - Reset ...................................... 30
Resettable Totals - Show ...................................... 30
Service Lamp - Reset ........................................... 31
Service Lamp - Set ............................................... 31
Snapshot Trigger - Configure ................................ 34
System Self Test ................................................... 36
Truck Payload - Calibrate ...................................... 38
Truck Payload - Configure ..................................... 38
Warning Operation ................................................ 39
Loader Payload System (LPS) General
Information .......................................................... 41
LPS Menu Functions Summary ............................ 42
LPS Calibration ..................................................... 43
Truck Payload System (TPS) General
Information .......................................................... 53
TPS Component Function .................................... 54
TPS On-Board Features ....................................... 55
TPS Off-Board Features ....................................... 57
TPS Normal Operation ......................................... 57
TPS Service Operation ......................................... 60
TPS Maximum Payload Speed Manager .............. 62
TPS Accuracy ....................................................... 67
Component Descriptions ...................................... 68
Main Module ......................................................... 69
Interface Module ................................................... 74
Display Modules .................................................... 76
Quad Gauge Module ............................................ 77
Speedometer/Tachometer Module ........................ 78
Message Center Module ....................................... 79
Keypad .................................................................. 85
Switches ............................................................... 89
Sensors ................................................................. 92
Data Connectors ................................................... 96
Action Lamp .......................................................... 97
Action Alarm ......................................................... 97
Payload Lamps ..................................................... 98

Service Lamp ........................................................ 98


Related Components ............................................ 99
Parameters ......................................................... 100

Testing and Adjusting Section


Testing and Adjusting
General Information ............................................ 155
Service Tools ...................................................... 156
Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes ..................... 157
Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes Using Abbreviated
Procedure ......................................................... 164
CID 0041 FMI 03 Sensor Power Supply (8 DCV)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 209
CID 0041 FMI 04 Sensor Power Supply (8 DCV)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 210
CID 0041 FMI 06 Sensor Power Supply (8 DCV)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 211
CID 0075 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 212
CID 0075 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 214
CID 0075 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Steering Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 215
CID 0096 FMI 03 Level Sensor (Fuel) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 217
CID 0096 FMI 04 Level Sensor (Fuel) Voltage Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 218
CID 0096 FMI 06 Level Sensor (Fuel) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 220
CID 0100 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 221
CID 0100 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 223
CID 0100 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 224
CID 0110 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Engine
Coolant) Voltage Above Normal - Test .............. 225
CID 0110 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Engine
Coolant) Voltage Below Normal - Test .............. 227
CID 0110 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Engine
Coolant) Current Above Normal - Test .............. 228
CID 0127 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Transmission Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 229
CID 0127 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Transmission Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 231
CID 0127 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Transmission Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 232
CID 0171 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Ambient Air)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 233
CID 0171 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Ambient Air)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 235
CID 0171 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Ambient Air)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 237
CID 0177 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Transmission
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 238
CID 0177 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Transmission
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 240
CID 0177 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Transmission
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 241
CID 0190 FMI 02 Speed Sensor (Engine) Incorrect
Signal - Test ...................................................... 242

4
Table of Contents

CID 0190 FMI 03 Speed Sensor (Engine) Voltage


Above Normal - Test ......................................... 244
CID 0190 FMI 04 Speed Sensor (Engine) Voltage
Below Normal - Test .......................................... 245
CID 0190 FMI 08 Speed Sensor (Engine) Abnormal
Signal - Test ...................................................... 246
CID 0248 FMI 09 CAT Data Link Abnormal Update Test ................................................................... 247
CID 0262 FMI 03 Sensor Power Supply (5 DCV)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 249
CID 0262 FMI 04 Sensor Power Supply (5 DCV)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 250
CID 0262 FMI 06 Sensor Power Supply (5 DCV)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 251
CID 0263 FMI 03 Sensor Power Supply (8 or 12
DCV) Voltage Above Normal - Test ................... 251
CID 0263 FMI 04 Sensor Power Supply (8 or 12
DCV) Voltage Below Normal - Test ................... 252
CID 0263 FMI 06 Sensor Power Supply (8 or 12
DCV) Current Above Normal - Test ................... 253
CID 0271 FMI 03 Alarm (Action) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 254
CID 0271 FMI 05 Alarm (Action) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 255
CID 0271 FMI 06 Alarm (Action) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 256
CID 0279 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Front
Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 257
CID 0279 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Front
Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 259
CID 0279 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Front
Aftercooler Coolant) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 261
CID 0280 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 262
CID 0280 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 264
CID 0280 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Pump Drive)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 265
CID 0295 FMI 02 Electronic Control Module
(Machine) Incorrect Signal - Test ...................... 266
CID 0295 FMI 09 Electronic Control Module
(Machine) Abnormal Update - Test ................... 268
CID 0295 FMI 12 Electronic Control Module
(Machine) Failed - Test ...................................... 270
CID 0296 FMI 02 Power Train Electronic Control
Module (Electronic Clutch Pressure Control)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 272
CID 0296 FMI 09 Power Train Electronic Control
Module (Electronic Clutch Pressure Control)
Abnormal Update) - Test ................................... 274
CID 0296 FMI 12 Power Train Electronic Control
Module (Electronic Clutch Pressure Control) Failed Test ................................................................... 276
CID 0324 FMI 03 Lamp (Action) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 278
CID 0324 FMI 05 Lamp (Action) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 278

CID 0324 FMI 06 Lamp (Action) Current Above


Normal - Test ..................................................... 279
CID 0341 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 281
CID 0341 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Current Below Normal - Test ............................. 281
CID 0341 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 282
CID 0341 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test .................. 282
CID 0350 FMI 00 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Above Normal Range - Test .............................. 283
CID 0350 FMI 01 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Below Normal Range - Test .............................. 283
CID 0350 FMI 02 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 284
CID 0350 FMI 03 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 284
CID 0350 FMI 04 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 285
CID 0350 FMI 06 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 285
CID 0350 FMI 08 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Abnormal Signal - Test ...................................... 286
CID 0350 FMI 11 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test .................. 286
CID 0350 FMI 13 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage) Out
of Calibration - Test ........................................... 287
CID 0364 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Lift Cylinder
Head End) Voltage Below Normal - Test ........... 287
CID 0364 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Lift Cylinder
Head End) Voltage Below Normal - Test ........... 287
CID 0364 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Lift Cylinder
Head End) Current Above Normal - Test .......... 287
CID 0371 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Voltage
Above Normal - Test ......................................... 287
CID 0371 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Current
Below Normal - Test .......................................... 288
CID 0371 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Current
Above Normal - Test ......................................... 289
CID 0371 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Failure
Mode Not Identifiable - Test .............................. 289
CID 0378 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Voltage Above Normal - Test ......... 290
CID 0378 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Current Below Normal - Test ......... 291
CID 0378 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Current Above Normal - Test ......... 292
CID 0378 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Failure Mode Not Identifiable Test ................................................................... 293
CID 0379 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Automatic
Lubrication) Voltage Above Normal - Test ......... 293
CID 0379 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Automatic
Lubrication) Voltage Below Normal - Test ......... 295
CID 0379 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Automatic
Lubrication) Current Above Normal - Test ......... 297
CID 0425 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Front Brake Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 298
CID 0425 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Front Brake Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 300

5
Table of Contents

CID 0425 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Front Brake Oil)


Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 301
CID 0426 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Rear Brake Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 302
CID 0426 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Rear Brake Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 304
CID 0426 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Rear Brake Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 305
CID 0427 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Front Axle
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 306
CID 0427 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Front Axle
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 308
CID 0427 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Front Axle
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 309
CID 0428 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Rear Axle
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 310
CID 0428 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Rear Axle
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 312
CID 0428 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Rear Axle
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 313
CID 0429 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 314
CID 0429 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 316
CID 0429 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Steering Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 317
CID 0430 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Steering Pilot
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 318
CID 0430 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Steering Pilot
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 320
CID 0430 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Steering Pilot
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 321
CID 0434 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Hydraulic Pilot
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 322
CID 0434 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Hydraulic Pilot
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 324
CID 0434 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Hydraulic Pilot
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 325
CID 0436 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Torque Converter
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 326
CID 0436 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Torque Converter
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 328
CID 0436 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Torque Converter
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 329
CID 0438 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 330
CID 0438 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Current Below Normal - Test ............................. 331
CID 0438 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 331
CID 0438 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test .................. 332
CID 0439 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 333
CID 0439 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Current Below Normal - Test ............................. 333
CID 0439 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 334
CID 0439 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test .................. 334
CID 0440 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 335

CID 0440 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)


Current Below Normal - Test ............................. 336
CID 0440 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 336
CID 0440 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test .................. 337
CID 0457 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Brake Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 338
CID 0457 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Brake Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 339
CID 0457 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Brake Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 340
CID 0458 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Tilt Cylinder Rod)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 342
CID 0458 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Tilt Cylinder Rod)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 342
CID 0458 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Tilt Cylinder Rod)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 342
CID 0533 FMI 02 Machine Electronic Control Module
(Integrated Brake) Incorrect Signal - Test ......... 342
CID 0533 FMI 09 Machine Electronic Control Module
(Integrated Brake) Abnormal Update - Test ...... 344
CID 0533 FMI 12 Machine Electronic Control Module
(Integrated Brake) Failed - Test ......................... 346
CID 0541 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Differential Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 348
CID 0541 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Differential Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 350
CID 0541 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Differential Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 351
CID 0562 FMI 02 Caterpillar Monitoring System
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 352
CID 0562 FMI 09 Caterpillar Monitoring System
Abnormal Update - Test .................................... 354
CID 0562 FMI 12 Caterpillar Monitoring System
Failed - Test ....................................................... 356
CID 0590 FMI 02 Electronic Control Module (Engine)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 358
CID 0590 FMI 09 Electronic Control Module (Engine)
Abnormal Update - Test .................................... 360
CID 0590 FMI 12 Electronic Control Module (Engine)
Failed - Test ....................................................... 362
CID 0596 FMI 02 Electronic Control Module
(Implement) Incorrect Signal - Test ................... 364
CID 0596 FMI 09 Electronic Control Module
(Implement) Abnormal Update - Test ................ 366
CID 0596 FMI 12 Electronic Control Module
(Implement) Failed - Test .................................. 368
CID 0600 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Hydraulic Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 370
CID 0600 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Hydraulic Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 372
CID 0600 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Hydraulic Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 374
CID 0650 FMI 02 Harness Code Incorrect Test ................................................................... 375
CID 0654 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Right
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 376
CID 0654 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Right
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ............ 378
CID 0654 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Right
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 379

6
Table of Contents

CID 0655 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Left


Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 380
CID 0655 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Left
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ............ 381
CID 0655 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Left
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 382
CID 0656 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Inlet) Voltage Above Normal - Test ... 383
CID 0656 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Inlet) Voltage Below Normal - Test ... 385
CID 0656 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Inlet) Current Above Normal - Test ... 386
CID 0657 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer
Brake Oil Cooler Outlet) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 387
CID 0657 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer
Brake Oil Cooler Outlet) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 388
CID 0657 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer
Brake Oil Cooler Outlet) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 389
CID 0658 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test .... 390
CID 0658 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 391
CID 0658 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 391
CID 0658 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 391
CID 0659 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test .... 391
CID 0659 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 391
CID 0659 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 391
CID 0659 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 392
CID 0672 FMI 01 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Below Normal Range - Test ................. 392
CID 0672 FMI 02 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Incorrect Signal - Test .......................... 392
CID 0672 FMI 03 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Voltage Above Normal - Test ................ 394
CID 0672 FMI 04 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Voltage Below Normal - Test ................ 395
CID 0672 FMI 08 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Abnormal Signal - Test ......................... 396
CID 0767 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Fixed
Displacement Pump Oil) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 397
CID 0767 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Fixed
Displacement Pump Oil) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 399

CID 0767 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Fixed


Displacement Pump Oil) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 400
CID 0801 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 1) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 401
CID 0802 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 2) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 401
CID 0803 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 3) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0804 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 4) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0805 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 5) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0806 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 6) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0807 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 7) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0808 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 8) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0809 FMI 02 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 1) Incorrect Signal - Test ........................... 403
CID 0809 FMI 12 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 1) Failed - Test ........................................... 403
CID 0810 FMI 02 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 2) Incorrect Signal - Test ........................... 403
CID 0810 FMI 12 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 2) Failed - Test ........................................... 403
CID 0811 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 1)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 403
CID 0811 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 1) Failed
- Test ................................................................. 403
CID 0812 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 2)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 403
CID 0812 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 2) Failed
- Test ................................................................. 403
CID 0813 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 3)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 404
CID 0813 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 3) Failed
- Test ................................................................. 404
CID 0814 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 4)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 404
CID 0814 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 4) Failed
- Test ................................................................. 404
CID 0815 FMI 02 Message Center Module (No. 1)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 404
CID 0815 FMI 12 Message Center Module (No. 1)
Failed - Test ....................................................... 404
CID 0816 FMI 02 Message Center Module (No. 2)
Incorrect Signal - Test ....................................... 404
CID 0816 FMI 12 Message Center Module (No. 2)
Failed - Test ....................................................... 404
CID 0817 FMI 02 Battery (Internal Backup) Incorrect
- Test ................................................................. 405
CID 0817 FMI 12 Battery (Internal Backup) Failed Test ................................................................... 405
CID 0819 FMI 02 Display Data Link Incorrect Test ................................................................... 405
CID 0819 FMI 03 Display Data Link Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 405
CID 0819 FMI 06 Display Data Link Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 406

7
Table of Contents

CID 0819 FMI 12 Display Data Link Failed Test ................................................................... 406
CID 0820 FMI 02 Keypad Data Link Incorrect Test ................................................................... 406
CID 0820 FMI 03 Keypad Data Link Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 407
CID 0820 FMI 06 Keypad Data Link Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 407
CID 0820 FMI 12 Keypad Data Link Failed Test ................................................................... 408
CID 0821 FMI 03 Display Power Supply Voltage
Above Normal - Test ......................................... 408
CID 0821 FMI 06 Display Power Supply Current
Above Normal - Test ......................................... 409
CID 0822 FMI 03 Display Backlighting Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 409
CID 0822 FMI 05 Display Backlighting Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 410
CID 0822 FMI 06 Display Backlighting Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 410
CID 0823 FMI 03 Lamp (Service) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 411
CID 0823 FMI 05 Lamp (Service) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 412
CID 0823 FMI 06 Lamp (Service) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 413
CID 0824 FMI 03 Lamp (Green Payload) Voltage
Above Normal - Test ......................................... 414
CID 0824 FMI 05 Lamp (Green Payload) Current
Below Normal - Test .......................................... 414
CID 0824 FMI 06 Lamp (Green Payload) Current
Above Normal - Test ......................................... 415
CID 0825 FMI 03 Lamp (Red Payload) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 416
CID 0825 FMI 05 Lamp (Red Payload) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 417
CID 0825 FMI 06 Lamp (Red Payload) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 418
CID 0826 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ..... 419
CID 0826 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...... 421
CID 0826 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ..... 422
CID 0826 FMI 11 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Failure Mode Not Identifiable Test ................................................................... 424
CID 0827 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 424
CID 0827 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 426
CID 0827 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 427
CID 0827 FMI 08 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Abnormal Signal - Test ...................................... 428
CID 0828 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............. 429
CID 0828 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) Voltage Below Normal - Test .............. 431
CID 0828 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) Current Above Normal - Test ............. 432
CID 0828 FMI 08 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) - Test .................................................. 434

CID 0829 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Rear


Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 435
CID 0829 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Rear
Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 436
CID 0829 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Rear
Aftercooler Coolant) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 437
CID 0830 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Front Brake
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 439
CID 0830 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Front Brake
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 440
CID 0830 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Front Brake
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 441
CID 0833 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Rear Brake
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 442
CID 0833 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Rear Brake
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 444
CID 0833 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Rear Brake
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 445
CID 0835 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Differential
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...................... 446
CID 0835 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Differential
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...................... 447
CID 0835 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Differential
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ...................... 449
CID 0838 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test .... 450
CID 0838 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 450
CID 0838 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 450
CID 0838 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 450
CID 0838 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 450
CID 0839 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test .... 451
CID 0839 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 451
CID 0839 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 451
CID 0839 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 451
CID 0839 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 451
CID 0840 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 451
CID 0840 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 452
CID 0840 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 452

8
Table of Contents

CID 0840 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear


Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 452
CID 0840 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 452
CID 0841 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test .... 452
CID 0841 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test ................................................................... 452
CID 0841 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test ................................................................... 453
CID 0841 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test ................................................................... 453
CID 0841 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 453
CID 0849 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Air System)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 453
CID 0849 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Air System)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 455
CID 0849 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Air System)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 457
CID 0851 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 458
CID 0851 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Below Normal - Test ............................. 460
CID 0851 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Pump Drive)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................ 462
CID 0852 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Right Front
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 463
CID 0852 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Right Front
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ............ 465
CID 0852 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Right Front
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 466
CID 0853 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Left Front
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 467
CID 0853 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Left Front
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ............ 469
CID 0853 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Left Front
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 470
CID 0854 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Right Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 472
CID 0854 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Right Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ............ 473
CID 0854 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Right Rear
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 474
CID 0855 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Left Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 476
CID 0855 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Left Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ............ 477
CID 0855 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Left Rear
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 478
CID 0890 FMI 09 Telemetry Data Link Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 480
CID 1089 FMI 02 Analysis Control Module Incorrect
Signal - Test ...................................................... 481
CID 1089 FMI 09 Analysis Control Module Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 483

CID 1089 FMI 12 Analysis Control Module Failed Test ................................................................... 484
Alert Indicator - Troubleshoot .............................. 487
Chip Detector - Test ............................................ 490
Lift or Tilt Cylinder Sensor - Troubleshoot ........... 491
Suspension Cylinder Sensor - Troubleshoot ....... 495
Troubleshooting Electrical System Using Abbreviated
Procedures ........................................................ 502
Charging System - Test ...................................... 503
Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor - Test .... 512
Sensor Signal Voltage - Test ............................... 513
Sensor Dynamic Test .......................................... 516
Diode Assembly - Test ........................................ 519
Position Sensor (Lift Arm) - Adjust ...................... 520
Speed Sensor (Engine) - Adjust ......................... 520
Module - Replace ................................................ 521
Battery - Replace ................................................ 521
Cable Connections ............................................. 522
Off-Board Service Tool ........................................ 524
Glossary of Terms ............................................... 535
System Schematic .............................................. 546

Index Section
Index ................................................................... 573

9
Systems Operation Section

Systems Operation Section


i01306165

General Information
SMCS Code: 7601

Illustration 1
Typical Block diagram of the Vital Information Management System (VIMS)

g00480385

10
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 2

g00511864

Illustration 4

g00480392

VIMS display components.

The VIMS keypad module that is used on the Large Wheel Loaders

(1) Gauge cluster module


(2) Speedometer/tachometer module
(3) Message center module
(4) Alert indicator
(5) Data logging indicator
(6) Gauges
(7) Tachometer
(8) Ground speed readout
(9) Actual gear indicator
(10) Message area
(11) Universal gauge
(12) Gauge warning area

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

Gauge Key
Key pressed indicator
Backward arrow key
Forward arrow Key

The Vital Information Management System (VIMS) is


a state-of-the-art onboard system with the following
features:

Machine systems are monitored for the operator.


Payload productivity information is measured by

the system and stored in onboard memory. This


information can be downloaded later for analysis.

Abnormal machine conditions and/or incorrect


operation of the machine are identified. The
diagnosis of these abnormal conditions will
allow the operator to modify the operation of
the machine in order to correct the problem.
The service technician is able to schedule
maintenance for the machine if the condition is
not related to the operation of the machine.

Prognostic information that can help predict


Illustration 3

g00511863

The VIMS keypad module that is used on the Off-Highway Trucks


and the Large Hydraulic Excavators
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

Gauge Key
Key pressed indicator
Backward arrow key
Forward arrow key

potential problems before failures can occur. This


allows the maintenance of the machine to be
scheduled during the preventive maintenance
servicing interval.
The components of the typical VIMS are listed here:

Up to eight interface modules


The main module
VIMS keypad
Display components
Switches
Sensors

11
Systems Operation Section

Solenoids

Table 1

VIMS EVENTS

Warning lamps
Data Event(1)

Maintenance Event(2)

Warning alarms

Filters

Open Sensor Circuits, etc.

Data Links

Temperature

Calibration

All VIMS modules communicate with each other,


with other electronic controls on the machine and
with systems off the machine through data links.
The five VIMS data links are listed here:

Possible Machine Damage


Performance (Payload)
Location (GPS)
(1)

CAT Data Link This two wire serial data link allows
communication between the VIMS modules and
other machine control systems.
Display Data Link This four wire data link allows
communication between the VIMS main module and
all display components except the keypad.
Keypad Data Link This two wire data link allows
communication between the VIMS main module
and the keypad.
RS-232 Data Link (Service Tool) This three wire
serial data link allows communication between the
VIMS main module and the service tool (laptop
computer).
RS-232 Data Link (Broadcast) This three-wire
serial data link allows communication between the
VIMS main module and other off-board systems
(non service tool). Onboard data can be passed
from the machine hands free if a user supplied
system such as radio telemetry is connected to
this port. This port can be configured by the
configuration software on the large wheel loaders
as a payload printer port instead.
Data
The Vital Information Management System uses four
types of data. The four types of data are listed here:
Sensed Data is read from the sensors and
the switches. The sensors and the switches
communicate with the interface modules.
Internal The data is generated within the VIMS
main module. The date and time are examples of
internal data.

(2)

This term was formerly referred to as a machine event.


This term was formerly referred to as a system event.

The operator is alerted to the existence of all


abnormal machine conditions by VIMS. All abnormal
machine conditions are called data (machine)
events. A high engine coolant temperature is an
example of a data event. The operator is alerted to
problems in the VIMS modules and other electronic
modules on the machine. The electronic system
failures are called a diagnostic type of maintenance
(system) events. The signal voltage of the coolant
temperature sensor that is above normal is an
example of a maintenance event. Stored VIMS
event (data and maintenance) information is used to
assist service personnel with machine maintenance
and troubleshooting.
DATA (MACHINE) events are related to a machine
system. The operator needs to RESPOND to this
event in most cases. For example, the operator
needs to modify operation in order to cool the
converter oil temperature when the temperature
is too high. When such an event is present,
pressing the F1 key will show more information.
The operator is shown additional information on
the second line of the message center. During
temperature warnings, the F1 key will cause
the display to show the actual temperature of the
machine system.
MAINTENANCE (SYSTEM) events are related to an
electrical system problem that requires a service
technician to PERFORM SERVICE or MAKE A
REPAIR. When a diagnostic code is present ,
pressing the F1 key will display the diagnostic
codes for the MID, the CID and the FMI. When a
MID for a different system is displayed in place
of a MID for VIMS, refer to the applicable Service
Manual for that electronic control.

Communicated The data is received through the


CAT data link from other machine systems. For
example, the engine speed is received through the
CAT data link from the electronic engine control.

Note: Multiple events (data and maintenance) for


a single machine condition may occur. The Vital
Information Management System can determine if
the actual cause of a stored event is due to a faulty
component or a true abnormal condition.

Calculated Data mathematically determined by


the VIMS main module. For example, the event
duration is calculated and stored in the event list.

Feature Variations

Events

12
Systems Operation Section

The same VIMS operates on a variety of different


machines. All the possible VIMS functions are
not performed on every machine. Configuration
software is used in order to identify the type of VIMS
machine. The configuration software also identifies
the available VIMS functions. The number of VIMS
modules and the type of VIMS modules may vary
in different applications.

Diagnostic information is stored for all maintenance


(system) events even if the event is not present
at the time of troubleshooting. A lap top personal
computer (PC) is used as the VIMS service tool.
Refer to the Testing and Adjusting, Off-Board
Service Tool section for more information.

The quantity of VIMS display components and the


type of available indications are listed here:

The occurrence of certain VIMS events and real time


machine conditions are recorded in on board VIMS
memory. The information is organized into seven
categories. This information is used to analyze
machine problems and forecast machine problems.
The information is typically used at a later date by
service technicians or management. The seven
categories of information are listed here:

Quad gauge modules (1) are used in order

to show changing machine conditions.


Speedometer/tachometer modules (2) are used to
show changing machine conditions. Tachometer
gauge (7) shows engine speed (RPM) information.
Gauges (6) are used to display information such
as temperature, pressure, and level.

One two-digit gear readout (9) per


speedometer/tachometer module shows
the actual transmission gear and the direction
information.

One three-digit speed readout (8) per


speedometer/tachometer module shows the
ground speed information ([MPH (km/h)]).

One alert indicator (4) per message center


module shows that an event has been detected
and the event is present.

One data logging indicator (5) per message

center module shows that the data logging


function is active. The data logging indicator
indicates that the data logger was activated via
the keypad.

One universal gauge (11) per message center

module (3). The value of the parameter that is


displayed on message area (10) will be indicated
by the universal gauge.

One message area (10) per message center


module. The parameter name, status and operator
instructions are information that is displayed on
the message area.
The type of indications and the quantity of
indications that are used in the VIMS display
area will vary according to the application. All the
indications that are used in the VIMS display area
may not be used on every machine. A machine may
use one or two of the message center modules. In
addition to the above indications, the action lamp
and the action alarm indicate the severity (warning
category) of a problem. The service indicator lamp
alerts the service technician of an event that has
occurred. The service indicator lamp indicates that
the event is present.

Stored Data

Event List/Summary List The event list is a record


of stored events (what happened and when) that
have occurred on the machine. Not all events
are stored. The record contains the last 500
events (data or maintenance) that are listed in
chronological order. This means that the events are
listed in the order of occurrence. The newest events
appear at the top of the list. The event list transfers
the oldest data into the event summary list when the
event list exceeds 500 records. The event summary
list is composed of the first five occurrences, the
last five occurrences and the worst five occurrences
that are recorded for any of the data events. The
event summary list is limited to storing only 500
records. Maintenance events can be identified by
the diagnostic codes (MID, CID and FMI).
All other events are data events. The event list is
accessible from the message center or with the
service tool.
Note: All events that contain the MID, the CID
and the FMI information are the diagnostic type
of maintenance event. Not all events without the
MID, the CID and the FMI information are data
events. An example of a maintenance event without
diagnostic codes is an open wire in the hydraulic
oil level circuit. Remember that a 2-wire switch
circuit (open switch) can report a true condition that
relates to a parameter. This same 2-wire switch
circuit can indicate a system failure (open wire) but
the failure is reported as low hydraulic oil level.

13
Systems Operation Section

Snapshot (Event Recorder) The Snapshot (event


recorder) stores a segment of history in real time
for all parameters (channels) at a one second
interval. The snapshot relates to a set of predefined
events. A snapshot is triggered automatically for
a severe event. The snapshot is then stored in
memory. The configuration software designates the
events that are considered to be severe events. The
keypad can be used to initiate a snapshot manually.
A snapshot consists of a flight recording of all
parameters that describe system conditions that
happened from five minutes before the event to
one minute after the event. This strategy is applied
to snapshots that are triggered immediately after
key ON. However, a portion of the five minutes of
data that occurred prior to the event that triggered
this snapshot was actually captured prior to turning
the key start switch OFF. This data may have been
stored hours or days before the event that triggered
the snapshot.
The VIMS has the capability of storing two sets
of snapshot information. If a snapshot is in the
process of being recorded and a second snapshot
is triggered the second snapshot is ignored.

Trend data that is collected during a period less

than one hour when the key start switch is turned


to the OFF position is discarded.

Trend points are the average of each trend that


was captured during the past hour. Each trend
must meet the conditions that are set for that
trend. For example, a boost trend is captured
each time that the coolant temperature and the
engine load have exceeded the trap conditions.
A single trend point for the designated hour is
calculated and stored when the measured trends
are averaged over one hour.
The trend data point or the responsible failure mode
identifier are stored according to the guidelines that
are listed below:
1. At least one Trend condition was met during at
least one continuous hour.
2. FMI 19 conditions not met is stored or the actual
FMI that was responsible for the conditions that
were not met for the entire store.
Trends are accessible only with the service tool.

The snapshot is accessible only with the service


tool.
Data Logger The data logger captures all the
machine parameters (channels) that are monitored
by VIMS. The data logger is recorded in real time
at one second intervals. The operation of the data
logger is similar to the snapshot (event recorder).
However, the data logger can not be triggered
automatically. The manual triggering of the data
logger can only be done by the service tool or the
keypad. The logger can be started and stopped
with a total recording time of 30 minutes.
The data logger is accessible only with the service
tool. The data logger can be reset by the service
tool or the keypad.
Note: Truck payload cycle data (time and date) can
be used as data logger basic information in place
of this data logger.
Trends Trend information consists of the
minimums, maximums and averages of parameter
data over time. Trend information is viewed
with VIMS-PC software. The trend information is
displayed as a graph or the trend information is
tabulated as columns of data. An example of trend
information is the average brake temperature per
hour. Trend information is recorded for predefined
parameters for each machine. Trend information is
recorded under the specified guidelines that are
listed here:

All one hour continuous trends begin when the


key start switch is turned to the ON position.

Note: Refer to table 2 for the recommended


download information for trends and the
recommended reset information for trends. This
should help prevent the loss of data or the corruption
of data. Machines that were built after June 1996
use the 9.X class of onboard configurations. The 9.X
class of onboard configurations will not damage the
data. The configuration simply drops off oldest data.

14
Systems Operation Section

Table 2

Recommended Service Meter Hour Download and Reset Times for Trends
On Board Software

(1)
(2)

LWL

OHT

LHEX

6.8X

Reset before 500 hours(1)

N/A

Reset before 500 hours(1)

7.0X

Reset before 500 hours(1)

N/A

N/A

9.0X

Reset before 1000 hours(2)

Reset before 500 hours(2)

N/A

9.3X

Reset before 1000 hours(2)

Reset before 500 hours(2)

Reset before 3500 hours(2)

9.4X

Reset before 1000 hours(2)

Reset before 500 hours(2)

N/A

9.5X

Reset before 1000

hours(2)

hours(2)

9.6X

Reset before 1000 hours(2)

Reset before 500

Reset before 3500 hours(2)

Reset before 3500 hours(2)


N/A

The Trends are not correctly time stamped. The Trend data will be incorrect if the data is not downloaded and then reset in less than 500
hours. The roll over point is determined by the configuration software.
The trends are time stamped while being collected onboard. This ensures that the trend is correct any time that the trends are downloaded.
Roll over is determined by the configuration software. At roll over, the oldest Trends are covered up with new trend data.

Cumulative Cumulative information is the number


of occurrences (counts) of specific events. An
example of cumulative information is total engine
revolutions or total fuel consumption over the life of
the machine or component. Cumulative information
is recorded for a standard set of parameters. The
parameters are defined in the configuration software
for each machine. The 9.5X class of source
software uses the configuration type in order to
determine that a new machines software has been
flashed into memory. Stored cumulative information
is retained during flashing of 9.5X or later classes
of source and configuration software. The on board
system collects life-time cumulatives with no need
to reset. The situations that will cause an automatic
resetting of the cumulatives are listed here:

A new configuration type is flashed into the

onboard memory. A VIDS 992G configuration that


is replaced by a VIMS 992G configuration is a
typical example of changing the configuration
type.

Note: The term configuration type describes the


system (VIMS or VIDS) and the model of the
machine.

A configuration is loaded with any changes to the


methods of calculating and storing cumulative
data. The change indicates that a correction
has actually been made to the configuration or
the VIMS main module has just been installed
from a different VIMS application. The new VIMS
main module may not recognize the methods of
calculating and storing cumulative data that is
used by the configuration.

The VIMS internal backup battery is removed


while the disconnect switch is in the OPEN
position.

Resetting of cumulatives manually is not required.


If the user desires, the cumulatives may be reset
manually. The reset process clears all cumulatives.
Because there is only one choice, cumulatives can
not be reset individually. If a reset of cumulatives is
requested, all the cumulatives will be reset.
Cumulatives are accessible only with the service
tool.

15
Systems Operation Section

Table 3

Recommended Service Meter Hour Download and Reset Times for Cumulatives
On board Software

(1)
(2)

LWL

OHT

LHEX

6.8X

Reset before 750 hours(1)

N/A

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

7.0X

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

N/A

N/A

9.0X

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

N/A

9.3X

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

9.4X

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

Reset before 750 hours.(1)

N/A

necessary.(2)

9.5X

No reset is

9.6X

No reset is necessary.(2)

No reset is

necessary.(2)

No reset is necessary.(2)

No reset is necessary.(2)
N/A

Cumulative data will begin to saturate at approximately 1000 hours. This means that a maximum number will be reached and then
increase no further.
The 9.5X or later on board software allows for the collection of lifetime cumulative records.

Histograms - Histogram information records the


history of a parameter since last reset. For example,
a histogram of the engine speed would indicate the
percentage of time that the engine operated within
a defined speed limit (example 0-699, 700-1299,
1300-1699, 1700-2199, 2200-up) and the time
interval (example 25 to 475 SMH or 1 January
1996 to 2 February 1996) of the data gathered.
Histograms can be used to evaluate the range of
operation for a parameter.
Histograms are accessible only with the service tool.
Table 4

Recommended Service Meter Hour Download and Reset Times for Histograms
On Board Software

(1)
(2)

OHT

LWL

HEX

6.8X

DO NOT RESET.(1)

N/A

DO NOT RESET (1).

7.0X

Reset before 750 hours(2)

N/A

9.0X

Reset before 750

hours(2)

9.3X

Reset before 750

hours(2)

9.4X

Reset before 750 hours(2)

Reset before 750 hours(2)

N/A

9.5X

Reset before 750 hours(2)

Reset before 750 hours(2)

Reset before 750 hours(2)

9.6X

Reset before 750 hours(2)

Reset before 750 hours(2)

N/A

N/A

Reset before 750

hours(2)

N/A

Reset before 750

hours(2)

Reset before 750 hours(2)

Never Reset, the data will be permanently corrupted.


Saturation could occur, meaning a maximum number will be reached and increase no further, between 1000 and 2000 hours for some
parameters.

Payload - Payload information is recorded for the


off-highway trucks and large wheel loaders, as
required.
Total payload data is accessible only with the
service tool. Basic data is available through
the message center by accessing resettable
cumulatives.

16
Systems Operation Section

i01306231

Table 6

VIMS History

VIMS Hardware Part Numbers


Version

SMCS Code: 7601

Interface

Battery

2.0

3E-3666
115-0648
118-9636
124-6134

3E-3667
118-9634
123-8164

9X-5402

3.0

130-5131
165-8682

138-1756
144-7172

101-1785

Hardware
This manual describes the V2.0 and V3.0 versions
of VIMS hardware. The original V2.0 VIMS hardware
(main and interface modules) went into production
in the third quarter of 1994. In the third quarter
of 1996, V3.0 hardware began production.
The interface modules have the same physical
appearance. Part numbers are the only way to tell
the difference. V2.0 main modules have the backup
battery holder for stored data on the side of the
module. In order to access the battery, a black
knob needs to be unscrewed. V3.0 main modules
have an egg shaped cover on the top of the
module. In order to gain access to the battery, two
screws must be removed. The battery is flat with
four pin type contacts on the bottom. An L-shaped
tool is required to pry the battery out.

Main

All modules are backward compatible. However, the


modules are not usually forward compatible. Refer
to the product support group of the business unit
for more information. However, 9.X software must
be used with V3.0 modules to gain full benefits and
features. As an example, a V3.0 main module can
be used on a machine that was built with the V2.0
module. This combination of hardware will work.
However, not all of the features that are available
with the V3.0 hardware will not work.

Software

VIMS onboard features are based on the hardware


and the source software. This chart lists the
combinations of the production hardware and the
software classes.

The VIMS main module is a dedicated computer.


The computer is dedicated to the task that is
described in this manual. The main module must be
loaded with two basic sets of software:

Table 5

An operating system (similar to MS-DOS on a PC).

VIMS Hardwareand Software Class History


Software Class

(1)

Model Usage

Hardware
Version

6.X

LHEX/OHT

2.0

7.X

OHT

2.0

8.X(1)

LWL

3.0

9.X

LHEX/LWL

3.0

9.3X

LHEX/LWL/OHT

3.0

9.4X

LWL

3.0

9.5X

OHT/LHEX/LWL

3.0

9.6X

LWL/OHT

3.0

9.62X

LWL/OHT

3.0

8.X was used in a limited field test.

An application program (similar to a word


processing program on a PC)

The operating system software that is required


by the main module is called source or source
software. This software file may be identified on
a PC with the file extension of src. Features are
determined by the on board class. The version
of source software is considered to be generic
because the same version of source software will
eventually be used for most applications of VIMS.
The application program is called a configuration.
Configuration software provides the main module
with the specific parameters that are used by the
machine. Some examples of the information that
is provided in the configuration software are listed
here: the engine speed which is considered as an
overspeed, the system voltage that is considered
too low, and the basic guidelines for operator
warnings.
VIMS Onboard Software Class History

17
Systems Operation Section

VIMS on board features are based upon hardware


and source software. A complete history of the
VIMS source software classes (change levels) that
have been used are listed in Table 7. The 9.X class
of software is the focus of this document. The 9.X
class of software is also called later software (9.3X,
9.4X, ect.). The source software that was used prior
to the 9.X class of source software is called earlier.
THE CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE IS DESIGNED
TO BE USED WITH A PARTICULAR PART NUMBER
OF THE SOURCE SOFTWARE (CLASS) AND THE
CONFIGURATION MUST BE USED WITH ONLY
THAT PART NUMBER.
VIMS Hardware, Software, and Service Tool
History
Total VIMS features are based upon onboard
hardware, onboard software and the VIMS-PC
software in the service tool. Table 7 lists the
serviceable combinations of the hardware and
software.
Table 7

Approx.
VIMS
Source Production
Software
Class

Software
Pt. No.

Model Usage

Hardware
Version

VIMS-PC
Version

ISB
Version

6.X

7/93
9/94

122-4810

LHEX
OHT

2.0/3.0

1.2/2.0/2.1/2.2/2.3/2.4

1.0/1.1

7.X

11/95

130-1345

OHT

2.0/3.0

1.2/2.0/2.1/2.2/2.3/2.4

1.0/1.1

8.X(1)

6/95

132-1968

LWL

3.0

2.0/2.1/2.2/2.3/2.4

1.0/1.1

9.X

7/96
3/96

133-4304

LHEX
LWL

2.0/3.0

2.0/2.1/2.2/2.3/2.4

1.0/1.1

9.3X

12/96

140-9474

LHEX
OHT
LWL

2.0/3.0

2.1/2.2/2.3/2.4

1.0/1.1

9.4X

5/97

147-2046

LWL

2.0/3.0

2.3 or later

1.1

9.5X

3/98

151-1293

OHT
LHEX
LWL

2.0/3.0

2.3 or later

1.2

9.6X

3/99

157-2892

LWL
OHT

2.0/3.0

VIMSpc99

N/A(4)

9.62X

12/00

199-6528

LWL
OHT

2.0/3.0

VIMSpc99 (V2.0.3)

N/A(4)

(1)
(4)

This version of software was used in limited field test only.


VIMSpc99 is used to modify VIMS configuration software.

18
Systems Operation Section

i01351829

Normal Operation
SMCS Code: 7601

Illustration 7

g00483761

Message Center Module

Illustration 5

g00302063

Gauge Cluster Module


(1) Gauge warning area
(2) Pictograph symbol

(9) Alert indicator


(10) Data logging indicator
(11) Message area
(12) Universal gauge
(13) Gauge warning area

During normal operation, the VIMS display


components provide the operator and the service
technician with the information that is listed here:

The display components indicate whether

the Vital Information Management System is


operating properly. Whenever the key start switch
is turned to the ON position, some of the VIMS
outputs (gauges and message center module)
briefly operate. This is a system self-test of the
display components. See the Systems Operation,
System Self Test topic for the complete test of
the VIMS outputs.

The measured value of present system conditions


Illustration 6
Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Tachometer
Pictograph symbol
Ground speed readout
Transmission actual gear readout

g00485026

are shown on the display components. The


machine systems are continuously monitored. The
normal range value of the gauges in the quad
gauge module are shown in the central region.

The display components will indicate whether an


abnormal machine system condition (data event)
exists. The machine systems are continuously
monitored. When an abnormal condition (problem)
exists, alert indicator (9) FLASHES. Message
area (11) shows the system parameter with
the abnormal condition and the value of the
parameter. Universal gauge (12) also shows the
relative value of the abnormal parameter. The
service indicator lamp is turned ON and the event
may be stored in the memory of the main module.
A problem that is more severe requires the action
lamp to FLASH and the action alarm is required
to SOUND. See the Systems Operation, Warning
Operation section.

19
Systems Operation Section

The display components will indicate when

a VIMS failure (maintenance event) exists.


Continuous checks are made for the existence
of electrical failures in the VIMS modules and
in the other electronic control modules (engine,
transmission, etc) installed on the machine. When
the Vital Information Management System detects
a diagnostic type of maintenance event (system
event), the service indicator lamp is activated.
The event is shown on the message area. The
event is also stored in the main module memory.
See the Systems Operation, Service Operations
section.

The Vital Information Management System enters


the normal mode when the key start switch is
turned to the ON position. This is the mode of
normal operation. The system will enter the normal
mode after the installation of valid source software
and configuration software. Refer to the Systems
Operation, Main Module section of this manual for
additional information on the modes of operation.
i01382740

Service Operations
SMCS Code: 7601
Numerous VIMS service operations can be initiated
by the operator or a service technician. A unique
service program code (SPC) is assigned to each
of the service operations. The service program
codes are entered through the VIMS keypad
module. Entering the service program code starts
the corresponding service operation. The service
operations are listed in Table 8.

20
Systems Operation Section

Table 8

VIMS Service Operations


Service Operation

Service Program Code

Service Program Code No.

ATTACH

288224

SERV

7378

Data Logger - Reset

DLRES

35737

Data Logger - Start/Stop

DLOG

3564

Display Backlighting - Set

BLT

258

Display Contrast - Set

CON

266

Display Language - Set

LA

52

Display Units - Set

UN

86

Event - Configure (9.6X or later)

ESET(1)

3738

Events Acknowledged - Show

EACK

3225

Event List - Show

ELIST

35478

Event Recorder - Start

EREC

3732

Events Statistics - Show

ESTAT

37828

Lubrication Cycle Times - Set

LUBSET

582738

Lubrication Manual - Start

LUBMAN

582626

Machine Status - Show

MSTAT

67828

Odometer - Set

ODO(1)

636

Resettable Totals - Reset (LHEX/OHT)

RESET

73738

Resettable Totals - Show (LHEX/OHT)

TOT

868

SVCLIT

782548

SVCSET(1)

782738

ERSET(1)

37738

TEST

8378

Truck Payload - Calibrate

PAYCAL(1)

729225

Truck Payload - Configure

PAYCONF(1)

7292663

Attachment Code - Configure


Calibration Modes - Enter

Service Lamp - Reset


Service Lamp - Set (9.5X or later)
Snapshot Trigger- Configure (9.5X or later)
System Self Test

(1)

The service tool is required to be connected and communicating with the machine before this SPC is active.

Each service program code is a unique number of


one to ten digits that abbreviates this operation.
The service program codes have a letter equivalent
that describes the service operation. This letter
equivalent makes remembering the service program
code for each operation easier. The English letter
equivalent for each service program code is shown
in parentheses. The same service program codes
are used regardless of the onboard language.
After entering the service program code on the
keypad, this request will begin after the OK
key is pressed. This command must be activated
within five seconds of entering the last SPC
character. The maximum delay that is allowed
between the entry of the SPC characters is five
seconds.

i01351847

Attachment Code - Configure


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 288224 (ATTACH)

21
Systems Operation Section

This service program allows the operator to


configure the attachment code for large wheel
loaders and the 5230 (S/N: 7LL99-Up) Large
Hydraulic Excavators. The Attachment Code is the
software version of the Harness Code. The harness
code is a hard wired configuration of jumper wires
that ground certain circuits in a harness code plug.
The VIMS broadcasts the attachment code via the
CAT data link to other electronic control modules on
the machine that need this code.
Note: Applicable attachment codes are listed on the
back of machine Electrical Schematic and in the
Operations and Maintenance Manual.
After ATTACH is entered from the keypad, the
operator presses the OK key. The message center
will show:

i00952599

Calibration Mode - Enter


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 7378 (SERV)
The service program code (SERV) is used to
enter the calibration modes and the calibration
procedures. The Vital Information Management
Systems configuration software defines the
calibration modes and the calibration procedures.
The arrow keys can be used to scroll through the
various calibration modes. The message center will
show:

Illustration 10
Illustration 8

g00485849

g00485847

Other calibration display messages are listed here:

The desired attachment code can then be entered


from the keypad by entering the desired attachment
code. Then press the OK key. If a valid attachment
code has been entered, the message center will
prompt the operator to re-enter the attachment
code. The message center will show:

LIFT ARM SNSR - CAL


IMPL RLF - VARIABLE PUMP
LINKAGE SENSORS - SET
TC PDL POS SENSORS - CAL
TC IMPLR SOL - CAL
TILT ARM SNSR - CAL
IMPL VALVE SOL - CAL

Illustration 9

g00485848

If the same code is entered again, this code will


be accepted as the new attachment code. If the
same code is not entered at the second prompt, the
new attachment code will not be accepted. The old
attachment code remains valid. A new attachment
code will not be accepted, if an invalid code is
entered at either prompt. The old attachment code
remains valid. If the OK key was pressed at
either prompt prior to entering a number, the old
attachment code remains valid.
Note: The Machine Status (MSTAT) (67828) code
can be used to view the present, active attachment
code.

IMPL RLF - FIX PUMP


LEFT PEDAL - CAL
IC HOLD PRES - CAL
REDUCED RIMPULL - CAL
Note: If the [OK] key is pressed, the message
stays on the display for 15 seconds. The message
will stay even if the [OK] key is pressed again.
i00952586

Data Logger - Reset


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 35737 (DLRES)

22
Systems Operation Section

This service program code resets the available data


logger storage time to 30 minutes. Use the keypad
to enter the service code 35737 (DLRES) and press
the OK key in order to reset the data logger.
Resetting the data logger erases any presently
stored information. The message area will show:

The information that is shown in illustration 12 is


displayed in the message area. The message area
will display the remaining storage time prior to
starting the data logger. When data logging is in
operation a series of dots scroll in the upper right
hand corner of the universal gauge.
Note: The dots in the upper right corner of the
universal gauge scroll only if data logging is started
from the keypad.
i00952589

Illustration 11

g00485813

Display Backlighting - Set


SMCS Code: 7601

Note: The Data Logger is the only downloadable


on board file that can be reset through the keypad
(VIMS-PC software is not needed).
i00952585

Data Logger - Start/Stop


SMCS Code: 7601

The following information describes the service


program code: 258 (BLT)
This service program code allows the backlight
intensity of the message area to be changed. After
the service program code is entered, the actions
that are listed here will occur in the following order:

The intensity will automatically decrease from the

The following information describes the service


program code: 3564 (DLOG)
This service program code starts or stops data
logging (storage of data) until 30 minutes of
information is stored. (If the data logger data is
being downloaded from the machine, the data
logger can not be started.) The data logger can
be started and the data logger can stopped any
number of times over any period of time (minutes,
hours or days) until the data logging time totals
30 minutes and eight seconds. The dots of the data
logger indicator are in the upper right hand corner
of the universal gauge. The dots of the data logger
indicator will stop scrolling when the data logger
is no longer recording data. The dots of the data
logger do not scroll when the service tool starts
the data logger. The remaining storage time of the
data logger is shown on the message area for five
seconds after entering this SPC on the keypad. The
format of the time is shown in minutes:seconds.
An example is shown here:

original setting to 0%.

The setting will automatically jump from 0% to


100%. The intensity will then decrease to the
original value.

Pressing the arrow keys will manually scroll


through the intensity settings.

As the message area scrolls in intensity, the


corresponding percentage of backlight intensity is
displayed in the message area. The arrow keys are
used in the scrolling procedure in order to select
a new backlight intensity setting. Press the OK
key in order to accept the new setting. Backlight
Intensity adjustment requires the use of VIMS V3.0
hardware and 9.X class or later on board software.

Illustration 13

Illustration 12

g00529116

g00485814

23
Systems Operation Section

i00952590

Display Contrast - Set


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the Service
Program Code: 266 (CON)
This service program code allows the contrast of the
message center to be changed. After the service
program code is entered, the actions that are listed
here will occur in the following order:

The contrast will automatically decrease from the


original setting to 0%.

The setting will automatically jump from 0% to


100%. The contrast will then decrease to the
original value.

Pressing the arrow keys will manually scroll


through the intensity settings.
As the message area scrolls in contrast, the
corresponding percentage of contrast is displayed
in the message area. The arrow keys are used in the
scrolling procedure in order to select a new contrast
setting. Press theOKkey in order to accept the
new selection.
Message center contrast adjustment requires the
use of VIMS: V3.0 hardware, 9.X class or later on
board software, and the 133-1840 or later VIMS
Message Center Module.

The primary language for a given VIMS configuration


is the language that will be active after a new
upload. English will always be one of the two
available onboard languages.
i00952587

Display Units - Set


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 86 (UN)
The service program code toggles the data that is
shown on the display. The data is toggled between
the English or Metric units of measurement.
Data is shown in the selected unit until the other
unit is selected. The new setting will remain until
the setting is changed by repeating this procedure.
The setting will not be changed when the key start
switch is in the OFF position.
i01306332

Event - Configure
SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 3738 (ESET)
This service program code is available with the 9.6X
class of source software or later.
The event - configure (ESET) command allows the
service technician to modify a configuration with
the Information System Builder software program in
order to turn off the functions that are listed here:

Event Storage
Illustration 14

g00485815

Event Display
Service Lamp

i00952588

Display Language - Set


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 52 (LA)
This service program code toggles the information
that is shown on the message area. The information
is toggled between the two available languages.
Information is shown in the selected language until
the other language is selected. This setting may
be performed when the key start switch is in the
OFF position.

Broadcast (Radio Telemetry System)


Note: The Event - Configure command is not
available for all events. The parameter must be
designated as user configured in the configuration
software.
Security
1. The service program code only functions while
the service tool (VIMS-PC) is connected.
2. After the service tool (VIMS-PC) is disconnected
for 30 seconds, this service program code will
no longer be active.

24
Systems Operation Section

Note: This command can only be viewed when


VIMS-PC is not connected.
Setup
1. Connect the service tool to the machine and
establish communications with VIMS-PC.
2. The message center should be in the background
mode. background mode displays the following
items on the message center: time, date, service
hours, and odometer reading (9.3X or later class
of on board software). Use the keypad to enter
the command ESET (3738). Then press the
OK key. The message center will show the
following message:

Illustration 16
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Illustration 15

g00510982

3. The service technician can select the desired


ESET configured event by scrolling through the
list of events. The service technician uses the
< and > arrow keys on the keypad in order
to scroll.
Note: The Master Event Number is a unique number
that is assigned to an event. The Master Event
Number is listed in the Data Event Report for a
given configuration. The Master Event Number is
viewed with the Information System Builder software
application. This report can be generated by
selecting the data event report option under the
Navigate Menu of the Information System Builder
software application. The numbers are listed in the
MST EVNT (Master Event) column of the report.

g00511040

Master event number


Event Storage function
Event display function
Service lamp function
Telemetry (broadcast) function
Factory default function
Status of the function
Name of event

4. The service technician can select the desired


function from the following list by pressing the
corresponding number key. The X indicates
that the function has been enabled. The -
indicates that the function has been disabled.
The definitions of the functions are listed below:
Event Storage Function (2) toggles the status
of the function from an X to a - in order to
indicate that the function has been disabled
(OFF).
The Event Display Function (3) toggles the status
of the function from an X to a - in order to
indicate that the function has been disabled
(OFF).
Service Lamp Function (4) toggles the status
of the function from an X to a - in order to
indicate that the function has been disabled
(OFF).
Telemetry (Broadcast)Function (5) toggles the
status of the function from an X to a - in
order to indicate that the Telemetry (Broadcast)
function has been disabled (OFF).
Factory Default function (6) toggles the status
of the function. The status is either an X or
a -. This is done in order to indicate that the
Factory Default has been enabled (ON) or that
the Factory Default has been disabled (OFF).
See the Notes.

25
Systems Operation Section

Note: All configurable events are set to the factory


defaults that are designated in the configuration
software until the default is changed by performing
this procedure.
Note: The ESET command references the functions
as the function has been setup in the configuration.
The ESET command can turn OFF a function ONLY
when the function is turned ON in the configuration
software. The ESET command will NOT allow a
function that is disabled from the factory in the
configuration software to be turned ON.

This service program code shows all active events


that have been acknowledged by the operator with
the keypad.

Illustration 19

g00485490

Procedure
i01306319

a. To set the EVENT DISPLAY function, press


the 2 key. The following message will be
displayed on the message center.

Event List - Show


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 35478 (ELIST)

Illustration 17

g00511120

This service program code shows the event list in


an abbreviated form. The entries of the event list
are displayed: last event in - first event out. The
first event out represents the INACTIVE time of
the event. Some events may appear out of order
based on the start times of the events. Use the
BACKWARD and FORWARD arrow keys to scroll
through the list. The message END OF LIST is
shown when the oldest event in the list is reached.

This list contains only inactive EVENTS. An


Illustration 18

g00552273

b. The > arrow key is used to toggle the status


(ON or OFF) of the EVENT DISPLAY. Press
the OK key in order to accept the change.
The message center will then display the
current Master Event Number message.
Refer to illustration 18.
If the X is selected then the message center
will display the event. If the - is selected the
message center will NOT display the event.
Use this procedure to modify the functions that are
listed here: EVENT STORAGE, SERVICE LAMP, and
RADIO TELEMETRY SYSTEM (BROADCAST).

inactive event has a defined start time and end


time. Active events will not appear in this list.

While the ELIST is displayed, any new event that


becomes inactive will be added to the beginning
of the ELIST. The new entry to the ELIST may
be viewed by pressing the backward arrow key
in order to move to the beginning of the new
ELIST.
Data (Machine) Events
The following information is shown in the VIMS
message area for each data (machine) event in
the event list:

The name of the parameter


The status of the parameter (LO, HI, etc.)

i00952454

Event Acknowledged - Show


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 3225 (EACK)

Service meter reading at the start of the event.


The event duration
The warning category
An example of a machine event with sensor
information is shown here:

26
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 20

g00485804

An example of a data event with switch information


is shown here:

Illustration 21

g00569208

245.2 is the service meter reading at the start of


the event. 000:04:13 is the duration of the event in
HHH:MM:SS format. The 2 that follows the event
duration represents the warning category 2.
Press the F1 key while you view a data event. This
function will replace the information that is shown
on the second line of the message area. The new
information that is shown contains information about
the maximum values that were measured for the
parameter such as 2266 RPM or LO (switch).
Pressing the OK key puts the message center
back into the previous mode. See the Systems
Operation, Keypad topic for additional information.
Pressing the OK key puts the message center
back into the original mode.
Maintenance/Diagnostic (System) Events
The following information is shown in the VIMS
message area for each system event in the event
list.

The name of the parameter

Illustration 22

g00551525

245.2 is the service meter reading at the start of


the event. 000:04:13 is the duration of the event in
HHH:MM:SS format. The 2 is the warning category.
When you view a diagnostic event, press the F1
key in order to replace the information that is shown
on the second line of the message area. The
information in the message area is replaced with
the MID-CID-FMI. The message center can be
returned to the original mode by pressing the OK
key. The FORWARD and BACKWARD arrow keys
are used to scroll through the event list.
See the Systems Operation, Keypad topic for
additional information.
i00952461

Event Recorder - Start


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 3732 (EREC)
This service program code manually latches a
snapshot that stores all parameter values for the
previous five minutes and the following one minute.
Each machine has the capability of storing two
sets of snapshot information. Automatic latching is
determined by the specified event. The event is
specified in the configuration software and/or the
event is enabled with the ERSET command. When
a manual snapshot is started, one of the following
three messages will be shown on the message area.

The status of the parameter (ERR, etc.)


Service meter reading at the start of the event.
The event duration
The event category
An example of a maintenance type of service event
with information about the sensor:

Illustration 23

g00485808

The above message indicates that the request was


accepted and the snapshot is latched.

27
Systems Operation Section

i01372780

Lubrication Interval - Set


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 582738 (LUBSET)
Illustration 24

g00485809

The above message indicates that the request


was denied. The request was denied because the
memory was not available.

This service program code is used to set the time


between each lubrication and the duration of each
lubrication. The duration of lubrication for individual
machines are listed here.

The duration of lubrication for off-highway trucks

is adjustable from 30 to 120 seconds. The factory


default is 75 seconds.

The duration of lubrication for large hydraulic

Illustration 25

g00485810

excavators is adjustable from 90 to 120 seconds.


The factory default for 9.5X configuration and
later VIMS software is 90 seconds. The factory
default was fixed at 75 seconds in the VIMS
software that was released prior to 9.5X.

The above message indicates that the request


was denied. The request was denied because the
previous snapshot was still in the storage process.

The duration of lubrication for large wheel

The Operations Manual contains an explanation of


the five minute snapshot. See the Operation Manual,
JERD2136, VIMS User Procedure Manual.

When this code is entered the display will first show:

loaders is set for 60 seconds. The duration is not


adjustable.

i00952456

Event Statistics - Show


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 37828 (ESTAT)
This service program code shows the number of
maintenance events and data events since the
main module memory was last cleared of all events
(event list). An example is shown here:

Illustration 27

g00485800

Use the arrow keys to adjust the time of the


lubrication intraval. This is the time in minutes
between the automatic lubrication interval.

The time interval for the off-highway trucks is


adjustable from 5 to 120 minutes. The factory
default setting is 60 minutes.

The time interval for the excavators is adjustable

from 5 to 30 minutes. The factory default setting is


10 minutes (9.5Xor later configuration software).

Illustration 26

g00485803

The time interval for the wheel loaders is


adjustable from 5 to 15 minutes. The factory
default setting is 15 minutes.
After the proper time is set press the OK key.
Use the arrow keys to adjust the lubrication duration
time. After the proper time is set press the OK
key. The message center will now show:

28
Systems Operation Section

The following message will be shown:

Illustration 28

g00549540

Illustration 29

Press the OK key again to exit LUBSET.


Off Highway Trucks The elapsed time (minutes)
between each of the lubrication intervals is counted
only when the ground speed is greater than 2.0
mph. Idle time under the shovel will not be counted
against the next lubrication interval.

g00485801

i01306305

Machine Status - Show


SMCS Code: 7601

Lubrication will continue for the programmed


duration, once the lubrication has begun.

The following information describes the Service


program code: 67828 (MSTAT)

Large Hydraulic Excavators The elapsed time


(minutes) between the lubrication interval is
counted only when the speed of the engine is
operating at a speed that is greater than 1400 rpm.
If engine speed decreases to less than 1400 rpm
during a lubrication, lubrication (duration) stops and
the lube pending state is begun. The lubrication
(duration) is reset at this time to the full programmed
period. The default duration is 90 minutes.

Note: All screens are English only.

When the engine speed returns to a value that is


greater than 1400 rpm, the lubrication process
restarts. The period of lubrication duration begins
again.

The version of the experimental source software

Large Wheel Loaders The elapsed time (minutes)


between each of the lubrication intervals is counted
only when the engine speed is greater than 1000
rpm.

This service program code is used to view various


sections of the machine status. The message area
will show:

The version of the source software


The version of the configuration software
that is installed for factory development
Note: The change level of the production software
(source software and the configuration software) is
always zero. The version number of the configuration
software is changed when the configuration is
revised by Information System Builder (ISB).

Lubrication will continue for the programmed


duration, once the lubrication has begun.
i00952453

Lubrication Manual - Start


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 582626 (LUBMAN)
This service program code is used to manually start
lubrication. This operation overrides the OFF time
set under the service program code of Lubrication
Cycle Time (LUBSET). The duration of lubrication
is the length of time that was programmed during
Autolube Cycle Time.

Illustration 30

g00548354

Pressing the > key will allow other aspects of the


machine status to be displayed in the following
order. The machine status and corresponding
message area display are shown here:

The CAT part number and the Hardware Version


(Main Module)

29
Systems Operation Section

Attachment codes are used on large wheel loaders.


Attachment codes are also used on the 5230
7LL99-Up Excavators. The attachment code will be
00 for most applications.

Illustration 31

g00485816

Illustration 36

g00485841

Choice of Language
Illustration 32

g00485817

Model Number
This message will display the model number of the
machine.
Illustration 37

g00485842

Configuration Type
This message will display VIMS or VIDS:

Illustration 33

g00550459

Serial Number (Product Identification Number)


Illustration 38

g00485843

Operator ID

Illustration 34

g00537449

The Operator ID will be used with all stored onboard


information. The Operator ID may be up to 7
characters (numbers and letters) in length.

Equipment Number
Note: The Equipment Number is assigned by the
customer.

Illustration 39

g00485844

i00952596

Illustration 35

Attachment Code

g00485840

Odometer - Set
SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 636 (ODO)

30
Systems Operation Section

This service program code allows the service


technician to alter the reading of the machine
odometer. The following list describes aspects of
this service program code:
Security
1. This service program code will only function if
the service tool (VIMS-PC) is connected.
2. If the service tool (VIMS-PC) becomes
disconnected for 30 seconds or longer, this
command will no longer be allowed to change
the setting of the odometer .
The following message is shown on the message
area after ODO (636) and OK are entered from
the keypad.

i00952598

Resettable Totals - Reset


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 73738 (RESET)
This service program code is applicable to all
resettable totals in the off-highway trucks and the
large hydraulic excavators.
Enter the following service code: 73738 (RESET).
Press the OK key in order to clear all the totals.
Press the OK key again in order to return the
message area to the previous mode. The RESET
service program code is active only while the
service program code TOT is being viewed.
i00952595

Resettable Totals - Show


SMCS Code: 7601
Illustration 40

g00553642

The desired setting of the machine odometer can


be entered from the keypad.

Large Hydraulic Excavators


The following information describes the service
program code: 868 (TOT)
This service program code allows the operator to
view the following information:

TRAVEL TIME
FUEL USED
Illustration 41

g00553644

The operator can then reset all resettable totals


since the last reset. The message area will show:

Press the OK key in order to accept the setting.


The following list contains the functions of the Input
keys:
OK This command accepts the setting of the
machine odometer.
F2 This command cancels the operation without
changing the present setting.
Left Arrow This command deletes the last
character or characters that were entered.

Illustration 42

g00485845

Off-Highway Trucks
The following information describes the service
program code: 868 (TOT)

31
Systems Operation Section

This service program code allows the operator to


view information. The operator can then reset the
information of the total payload activity since the
last reset. Refer to the Systems Operation, TPS
Service Operation section of this manual for the
procedure to show resettable totals.
i01306355

Service Lamp - Reset

The key start switch is turned to the OFF position


and then back to the ON position.

Events that are associated with the reset

procedure that are still active at the time that you


turn the key start switch to the OFF position.

Events that are still active when the key start


switch is turned back to the ON position.

There are no additional active events since the


SVCLIT reset procedure.

SMCS Code: 7601


The following information describes the service
program code: 782548 (SVCLIT)
This service program code turns OFF the service
indicator lamp for most active events (data or
maintenance) that are presently shown on the
display area.

With source software prior to 9.X, the service


indicator lamp will turn ON again when the key start
switch is turned to the OFF position and then back
to the ON position. This is true provided that the
reset events are still active.
i00955778

Note: Not all active events can be acknowledged.

Service Lamp - Set

First, all of the active events must be turned OFF via


the keypad. Enter the EACK command in order to
show all the acknowledged events. Use the arrow
keys in order to scroll through the event list. A #
sign is located at the right of the display beside
the warning category. The # sign indicates that
the service indicator lamp is illuminated for the
displayed event.

SMCS Code: 7601


The following information describes the service
program code: 782738 (SVCSET)
This service program code allows the service
technician to choose the display mode that controls
the service lamp. The service lamp setting can
be selected for the entire system. This includes
completely turning OFF the service lamp.
Note: This feature is a characteristic of the 9.5X and
later class of on board software.
Security

Illustration 43

g00485490

The number 2 represents the category of event.


Use the keypad to enter SVCLIT. Press the OK
key in order to turn off the lamp. The # sign will
disappear. The service indicator lamp will turn OFF
after this procedure has been completed for ALL
active events.

1. This service program code only functions while


the service tool (VIMS-PC) is connected.
2. After the service tool (VIMS-PC) is disconnected
for 30 seconds, this service program code will
no longer be active.
The service technician may choose from any of the
five display modes of the service lamp:
1. 1-2 SNAPSHOTS FULL: The possible actions of
the service lamp for this mode are listed below
after either one or both of the snapshots are
stored:

The service lamp flashes at ten minutes


Illustration 44

g00485491

With the 9.X and later classes of onboard software,


the service indicator lamp will stay OFF under the
following conditions:

intervals: two seconds on and two seconds


off. The sequence repeats ten times when the
memory of snapshot No. 1 is full.

The service lamp flashes at five minute


intervals: four seconds on and two seconds
off. The sequence repeats ten times when the
memory of both snapshots are full.

32
Systems Operation Section

The service lamp is illuminated steadily when


any event is present.

The service lamp will flash at an interval: one


second on/one second off. The service lamp
will flash when an event that could cause
damage to the machine is detected.

2. 2 SNAPSHOTS FULL: The possible actions of the


service lamp for this mode are listed below only
after the second snapshot is stored:

5. NEVER ON: The service lamp is disabled in


this mode for all cases. The service lamp will
never illuminate.
Note: Snapshot is a new term that has replaced
Event Recorder. Snapshot data that is collected
by the on board system is viewed with VIMS-PC.
Files with .evr, ev1, ev2, etc. extensions are the
snapshot files. VIMS-PC uses these files in order to
display snapshot data.
Procedure

The service lamp flashes at five minute

intervals: four seconds on and two seconds


off. This sequence is repeated ten times. The
sequence is then repeated after a five minute
pause.

The service lamp is illuminated steadily when


any event is present.

The service lamp will flash: one second on

and one second off. The service lamp will


flash when an event that could cause damage
to the machine is detected.

Note: This service program code is in a view only


mode when VIMS-PC is not connected.
1. Connect the service tool (VIMS-PC) to the
RS-232 connector. The message center should
be in the background mode. The following
items should be displayed on the message
center: time, date, and service hours. Enter the
SVCSET (782738) command via the keypad. The
message center will show:

Note: The operator does not receive a notification in


this mode if the memory for snapshot No. 1 is full.
3. NO SNAPSHOT NOTICE: The possible actions of
the service lamp in this mode are listed below:

There is no indication of the number of


snapshots that are stored in memory.

The service lamp is illuminated steadily when


an event is present.

The service lamp will flash at an interval: one


second on and one second off. The service
lamp will flash when an event that could cause
damage to the machine is detected.
Note: The operator does not receive a notification in
this mode if the memory for either snapshot is full.

Illustration 45

g00549442

Note: The display first shows the present setting.


The default setting is displayed on the message
center when a new source has been loaded or a
new configuration has been loaded. The previous
example reflects the default setting of 1.1-2
SNAPSHOT FULL.
2. The arrow keys are used to move through the list
of available settings. The OK key selects the
desired setting.

4. DAMAGE EVENTS ONLY: The possible actions of


the service lamp for this mode are listed below:

The service lamp will flash at an interval: one


second on and one second off. The service
lamp will flash when any event that could
cause damage to the machine is detected.

Illustration 46

g00487242

Press the right arrow key in order to advance to next setting.

There is no indication regarding other events.


Note: The operator does not receive a notification in
this mode if the memory for either snapshot is full.

33
Systems Operation Section

The user selects a new setting with VIMS-PC.

The service tool (VIMS-PC) must be connected to


the machine.

The following table summarizes the service lamp


behavior in the five lamp setting modes.

Illustration 47

g00487243

Press the right arrow key in order to advance to next setting.

Illustration 48

g00487244

Press the right arrow key in order to advance to next setting.

Illustration 49

g00487245

Note: If the right arrow key is pressed again the list


remains at the last setting. Press the left arrow key
in order to move back through the settings.
3. Press the OK key in order to accept the setting
when the desired Service Lamp Setting is
displayed on the message center. The option that
was selected is now the new service lamp mode.

Illustration 50

g00487244

Note: The setting of the service lamp is set to option


4. The title of option 4 is DAMAGE EVENTS ONLY.
This setting will be used for all operations until one
of the following events occur:

New source software is loaded.


New configuration software is loaded.
The backup battery is replaced while the
disconnect switch is in the OFF position.

34
Systems Operation Section

Table 9

Service Lamp Behavior


Choice
No.

Lamp Setting Mode

Damage Event

Active Event

2nd Snapsot
Full

1st Snapshot
Full

1-2 Snapshot Full

Flashing

ON

Flashes Every
Five Minutes

Flashes Every
10 Minutes

2 Snapshots Full

Flashing

ON

Flashes Every
Five Minutes

OFF

No Snapshot Notice

Flashing

ON

OFF

OFF

Damage Events Only

Flashing

OFF

OFF

OFF

Never On

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

i00956097

Snapshot Trigger - Configure


SMCS Code: 7601
The following information describes the service
program code: 37738 (ERSET)
This feature is a characteristic of the 9.5X or later
class of on board software.
This snapshot trigger (or event recorder trigger)
allows the service technician to enter an event in
order to program an autotriggered snapshot. This
snapshot will be in addition to the snapshots that
are already programmed into the configuration.
The configured snapshot will remain active until
the snapshot is cancelled by entering a different
selection. The selection can be also cleared by
reinstalling the configuration software.
Security

Connect VIMS-PC to the machine. The message


center should be in the background mode. This
means that the following items should be displayed
on the message center: time, date, service hours,
and the odometer reading. Use the keypad in order
to enter the command ERSET (37738). Then
press OK. If a previous trigger has been set,
the message center will show the following text in
order to indicate the event that had been previously
selected.

Illustration 51

g00488913

The message will then alternate to the confirmation


mode.

1. This service program code only functions while


the service tool (VIMS-PC) is connected.
2. After the service tool (VIMS-PC) is
disconnected for 30 seconds, the service
program code will no longer be allowed to
change.
Note: This command may only be viewed when the
service tool is not connected to the machine. No
changes will be allowed.

Illustration 52

g00488914

When a trigger has not been defined, the following


message is shown on the message center:

Procedure: Service Tool Connection

Illustration 53

g00488915

35
Systems Operation Section

These messages will alternate at three second


intervals.
Press the OK key in order to exit the menu with
no changes. Press the right arrow key in order to
enter the snapshot trigger select mode.
Procedure to Program
Illustration 56

The entry mode display always begins with the


trigger that was entered last. The entry mode is
blank, if no trigger event was originally set. Data
that was input incorrectly can be corrected in the
edit mode. A blinking cursor indicates the input
position for the data within the entry field.

g00567782

The left arrow key will back up the cursor in order to


remove the last digit that was entered. The extra
5 that is shown in illustration 55 was erased with
the left arrow key.

The following display is the starting entry screen


with no event trigger set:

Illustration 57

Illustration 54

g00488916

The following display is the starting entry screen


with a previously set event trigger:

Illustration 55

g00567781

The Master Event trigger number is entered from


the keypad in the entry mode. Use the left arrow
key in order to erase incorrect entries and press the
OK key in order to set the trigger.
Note: The Master Event Number ID is a unique
number that is assigned to each event. The Master
Event Number is listed in the Data Event Report
for a given configuration. The Master Event Number
is viewed with the Information System Builder
software application. This report can be generated
by selecting the data event report option under the
Navigate Menu of the Information System Builder
software application. The numbers are listed in the
MST EVNT (Master Event) column of the report.

g00567782

Press the OK key in order to set the trigger event


when the number is correct. The confirmation
message is displayed when the trigger has been
set. The display will then show the name and the
status message for the selected event. This is
done in order to confirm the choice.

Illustration 58

g00488913

The display will return to the confirmation mode.


This allows the user to confirm the present entry or
a new trigger event may be entered.
The event trigger in this example is set to Master
Event 25 (ENG COOL TEMP HI). The setting is
retained in battery backed onboard memory. This
setting will be used for all operations until one of the
following events occur:

New source software is flashed.


New configuration software is flashed.
The backup battery is replaced.
The user selects a new trigger event or different

trigger event. VIMS-PC must be connected to the


machine before any changes can be made.

36
Systems Operation Section

If an undefined number has been entered, any


existing setting will be cleared and the following
message will be displayed for three seconds prior
to returning to the confirmation mode.

When VIMS-PC is disconnected during the event


ID entry, this service program code is terminated.
If VIMS-PC is disconnected during the
confirmation prompt, the setting is not affected. If
the prompt indicated TRIGGER NOT SET, then no
trigger is set. The trigger will be set if VIMS was
verifying the event ID.
i00951757

Illustration 59

g00488919

System Self Test


SMCS Code: 7601-532

When the OK key is pressed with a zero or the


field is left blank, the following message will be
displayed for three seconds prior to returning to the
confirmation mode.

Illustration 60

The following information describes the service


program code: 8378 (TEST)

g00488940

The message in illustration 61 is shown when no


trigger has been set. The message will be displayed
for any of the situations that are listed here:
Illustration 62

No trigger was originally set.

g00570104

VIMS Display Components

The event ID (Master Event Number) that was


entered was zero.

An invalid event ID (Master Event Number) was


entered.

The OK key is pressed with a blank input line.

Illustration 61

g00488915

At this point, the trigger is not set. The service


technician must press the OK key in order to
confirm the desired setting.

Disconnecting VIMS-PC

(1) Gauge cluster module. (2) Speedometer/tachometer module.


(3) Message center module. (4) Alert indicator. (5) Data logging
indicator. (6) Gauges. (7) Tachometer. (8) Ground speed readout.
(9) Transmission actual gear readout. (10) Message area. (11)
Universal gauge. (12) Gauge warning area.

This service program code causes a self test of the


outputs of VIMS. The outputs for the VIMS are listed
here: display modules, the action lamp, service
lamp, and the action alarm. This test is also initiated
when the key start switch is turned from the OFF to
the ON position. The length of time for a self test is
approximately six seconds.
This test will not prevent the operator from
cranking and starting the engine. However,
allowing the self-test to run completely is
recommended prior to cranking the engine.

37
Systems Operation Section

Note: The only situation that can cause an internal


calibration of the gauges (6) and the tachometer
(7) is a Key ON self test. The Key ON self test is
initiated by turning the key start switch from the
OFF position to ON position. When the key start
switch is turned ON the gauge indicators (6) and
the tachometer indicator (7) jump to the mid-scale
position. The gauges will then sweep to zero. The
gauges are now ready for the system test to begin.
Note: A better description of the self test is available
for the serviced machine. Refer to the Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
The following items are indications of the system
test.

Illustration 64

g00548354

Tachometer indicator (7) drops to zero from the

present engine speed and the indicator sweeps


to full scale. After the indicator reaches full scale,
the tachometer indicator (7) returns to the present
engine speed.

Ground speed readout (8) turns ON every

Alert indicator (4) FLASHES.

segment of the readout. The readout looks like


188.

Data logging indicator (5) scrolls.


Universal gauge (11) sweeps from zero (left) to

full scale (right). The gauge sweeps back to the


actual condition of the machine for the selected
parameter or the parameter that is associated
with an active event.

Transmission gear readout (9) turns ON every


segment of the readout.

The action lamp illuminates.


The action alarm turns ON and OFF as if a
category 3 warning is present.

Gauge warning area (12) at each end of the


universal gauge is turned ON.

Gauge indicators (6) drop from the present

Message area (10) illuminates every dot on the


readout. Self test with the key ON shows the
following items: the part number of the source
software, the part number of the configuration
software, and the version of configuration
hardware. The following example is for early
systems:

S Source

reading to near zero. The indicators then sweep


to full scale. The indicators return to the values
that were shown prior to the test.

MPH indicator and KM/H indicator turn ON.


The background mode shows the time of day and
the machine hours are shown on the message
area if there are no active events. The payload
data is shown instead of the background display
during the payload cycle.

C Configuration

The payload lamps flash (OHT)

H Hardware

The service lamp will flash.


The following example is a message center display
prior to the 9.X class of on board software.

Illustration 63

g00485524

The following example is for later systems (9.X or


later class of on board software):

Illustration 65

g00485539

The following example is a message center display


for a off highway truck (9.3X or later class of on
board software).

38
Systems Operation Section

Refer to the Systems Operation, TPS Service


Operation section of this manual for the truck
payload calibration procedure.
i00951345

Truck Payload - Configure


Illustration 66

g00485561

The following display is shown on the message


area if the VIMS main module has a missing
source software and/or configuration software:

Note: These messages are the result of limited


mode operation. Refer to the Systems Operation,
Main Module section of this manual.
The following message center display is for the
V2.0 hardware.

SMCS Code: 7494; 7601


The following information describes the need for the
service program code: 7292663 (PAYCONF)
This service program code configures the truck
payload monitoring system for maximum machine
payload (weight) and the last pass indicator
(ON/OFF).
Note: The PAYCONF service program code is not
applicable to large hydraulic excavators or large
wheel loaders.
Refer to the Systems Operation, TPS Service
Operation section of this manual for the truck
payload configuration procedure.

Illustration 67

g00485565

The following message center display is for the


V3.0 hardware. The display includes a full category
3 warning.

Illustration 68

g00485567

i00951029

Truck Payload - Calibrate


SMCS Code: 7494; 7601
The following information describes the need for
using the service program code: 729225 (PAYCAL)
Payload calibration is necessary when one or more
of the following items are replaced: VIMS backup
battery (only if the disconnect switch is in the OPEN
position), VIMS main module, source software
(prior to 9.5X or later class of on board software),
configuration software (prior to 9.5X or later class
of on board software), suspension cylinders, and
suspension cylinder pressure sensors.

39
Systems Operation Section

i01306360

Warning Operation
SMCS Code: 7601
Table 10

WARNING OPERATION
Warning Indications
Warning
Category

Alert
Indicator
Flashes (3)

(4)

2-S

(4)

(4)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Action
Lamp
Flashes(4)

(1)

Action
Alarm
Sounds

Operator Action Required

Possible Result (2)

No immediate action is required.


The system needs attention soon.

No harmful effects or no
damaging effects.

Change machine operation or


perform maintenance to the system.

Severe damage to
components can occur.

(5)

Immediately change the machine


operation.

Severe damage to machine


components

(6)

Immediately perform a safe engine


shutdown.

Injury to the operator


or severe damage to
components can occur.

The active warning indications are marked with an X.


This is the possible result, if the operator takes no action.
The alert indicator flashes at a 10 Hz rate.
The action lamp will flash at a 1 Hz rate (1 second ON, 1 second Off).
Steady
The action alarm sounds at a 1 Hz rate (1 second ON, 1 second Off).

Illustration 69

g00302063

Illustration 70

Gauge Cluster Module

Speedometer/Tachometer Module

(1) Gauge warning area


(2) Pictograph symbol

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Tachometer
Pictograph symbol for engine speed
Ground speed readout
Readout of the actual Transmission gear

g00485026

40
Systems Operation Section

The action alarm is SOUNDED. The action alarm


is ON for one second and OFF for one second
during a category 3. The action alarm is ON
continuously for category 2-S.

Note: More than one input is required in order to


activate some warning indications . The warning
indications that are activated will be determined by
the main module.

Illustration 71

g00515428

Message Center Module


(7) Alert indicator.
(8) Data logging indicator.
(9) Message area.
(10) Universal gauge
(11) Gauge warning area

The operator will be warned of immediate problems


with a machine system or impending problems with
a machine system by VIMS.
Warning operations are activated when the VIMS
module detects a problem with a signal. The
problem signal reflects an abnormal condition of
the machine (machine events). Warning operations
are also activated when the VIMS module detects
a problem with the control system (system event).
Switches, sensors, and other electronic control
modules send electronic signals to the VIMS
modules. The problem signals are listed here:

When a condition exceeds the trip point of the


switch, the switch opens.

When a condition exceeds the trip point of the


switch, the switch closes.

Any abnormal sensor signal that is detected by


the main module
The main module analyzes the problem signals. The
main module then notifies the operator by activating
the appropriate warning indications on the display
components. The warning indications are listed
here:

FLASHING of the alert indicator on the message


center. (The alert indicator flashes approximately
ten times per second.)

The action lamp FLASHES. (The action lamp is


ON for one second and OFF for one second.)

Data events and maintenance events are classified


into multiple warning categories. There are four
warning categories that are shown to the operator.
The categories are based on the severity of the
problem and this dictates the response that is
required by the operator. Warning category 1
represents the least severe problem and warning
category 3 represents the most severe problem. The
warning categories are identified for the operator
according to the combination of warning indications
that are active. Refer to table 10 for additional
information on Warning Operations. When multiple
events are present, the message area will scroll
through all the events in three second intervals.
When a category 3 event is active, scrolling through
the category 1 and 2 events is not permitted.
The warning category of an event may be raised
to a higher warning category automatically. Event
duration is used in order to determine if a change in
the category is necessary. An example of an event
that would require a category change: The warning
category 2 for the transmission lube temperature
(off-highway truck) changes to a warning category
3 after 150 seconds.
When a category 1 or category 2 event occurs, the
operator may acknowledge the event. The operator
acknowledges the events by pressing the OK
key on the keypad. The following information is
recorded in the event list for each event:

The time of occurrence


The number of times that an event is
acknowledged by the operator.
After an event is acknowledged, the warning
indications may disappear for a specified time
period. The warning indications will reappear for an
event that is still active after the time period elapses.
These warnings may be acknowledged again.

41
Systems Operation Section

The Category 2-S is a conventional Category 2 with


a continuous action alarm. A Category 2 that is
considered to be a severe condition will cause a
category 2-S to be logged. A Category 2 instructs
the operator to change the operation of the machine
in order to correct the condition that is responsible
for the warning. The operator is instructed to
IMMEDIATELY change operation of the machine
that relates to certain Category 2-S events.
Note: Most category 3 events cannot be
acknowledged by the operator.
i00999255

Loader Payload System (LPS)


General Information
SMCS Code: 7494; 7601

Illustration 72
Block Diagram of the VIMS Loader Payload System

g00511354

42
Systems Operation Section

The VIMS Loader Payload System (VIMS/LPS)


is used on the large wheel loaders. The Loader
Payload System is a subsystem of the standard
VIMS. The keypad is used by the operator to
interface with the system. The message center
provides a visual display of payload system menus
and functions. The main module receives lift
cylinder pressure information over the CAT data
link. The main module receives lift cylinder position
information over the CAT data link. Additional
hardware is a Payload Store button and an
optional printer in the cab.
The VIMS/LPS configurations are flashed to the
onboard system from the service tool through a
standard VIMS RS-232 interface. The standard VIMS
RS-232 off board systems interface will also be used
to download machine productivity information to the
Service Tool (laptop computer) for later analysis.
Note: The printer and broadcast interfaces share
an output from the VIMS main module. This one
output will have both a printer and broadcast port.
Information System Builder is used to configure this
port in the VIMS configuration software. Only one of
the functions will be active, because both functions
cannot be supported simultaneously.
Reference the following publications for more
information on the Loader Payload System:

System Operation, RENR2517, Large Wheel


Loader VIMS Payload Users Manual

VIMS User Procedures Manual , JERD2136


992G, 994, and 994D Wheel Loader Operation
and Maintenance Manuals

i00999364

LPS Menu Functions Summary

(Table 11, contd)

F1/MENU
1 2

Enter a new blast number.

F1/MENU
1 3

Enter a new target truck weight.

F1/MENU
1 4

Enter a new truck counter value.

F1/MENU
1 5

Enter a new operator.

F1/MENU
1 6

This command allows the operator to


toggle the payload horn ON and OFF
via the keypad.

F1/MENU
2

Reweighs the current bucket load.

F1/MENU
3

Selects the display mode of the


message center.

F1/MENU
4

View/print productivity report


information

F1/MENU
5 0

Executes a list viewer in order to check


the calibration information.(Date,Time
and etc.)

F1/MENU
5 1

Executes a mode to check the weigh


range.

F1/MENU
5 2

Executes a mode to set the weigh


range.

F1/MENU
5 3

Enter a carryback weight.

F1/MENU
5 4

Enter a calibration weight.

F1/MENU
5 5

Executes a calibration mode for a new


or revised calibration.

F1/MENU
5 6

Enter the bucket volume.

F1/MENU
6

Executes a sub-menu used to turn


Loader Payload ON or OFF.

STORE

Permanently stores truck/cycle/delay


information for download, later.

F3/DELAY

Allows the selection of a new loader


delay code.

F2/CLEAR

Clears the last non stored bucket load


from memory.

GAUGE

Sets the virtual gauge to view a VIMS


parameters.

ID

Enter an operator ID.

SMCS Code: 7494; 7601


The following table is a summary of the VIMS/LPS
supported functions. The keypad command is listed
in the first column. The second column is a brief
description.
Table 11

Command

Description

F1/Menu
0

Enter a new truck ID.

F1/MENU
1 0

Enter a new material.

F1/MENU
1 1

Enter a new load site.


(continued)

43
Systems Operation Section

i00999497

LPS Calibration
SMCS Code: 7494; 7601
The calibration functions are accessed through
the VIMS/LPS menus. The calibration functions are
grouped under a single sub-menu. This allows the
operator to perform the following tasks:

The calibration information is shown as a scrollable


list of items on the message center. The contents
of the list are displayed one value at a time. The
description of each item is shown on the first line.
The present value is shown on the second line.
Message center displays of calibration information
are shown below.

Check the calibration weight of the present


calibration.

Check the carryback weight in the present


calibration.

Check the date of the last modification.

Illustration 73

g00511663

Press the > key.

Set the present weigh range.


Check the present weigh range. Pressures are
sampled over a portion of the lift arc in order to
calculate a payload weight.

Enter the present carryback weight value or


modify the present carryback weight value.
Illustration 74

Enter the present calibration weight value or


modify the present calibration weight value.

g00511666

Press the > key.

Start a new calibration. This calibration completely


replaces any previous calibrations.

Enter the present bucket volume value or modify


the present bucket volume value.

Check Calibration Information


Access to the calibration information is gained
through the VIMS/LPS menus.

Illustration 75

g00511667

Press the > key.

The Check Calibration Information function allows


the operator to check five pieces of information
about the currently active calibration.

The date and time of the last complete calibration


was performed.

The present calibration weight.

Illustration 76

The date and time of the last modification to the

Press the > key.

g00511668

calibration weight.

The present carryback weight.


The date and time of the last modification to the
carryback weight.
Performing a complete calibration also requires
modifying the calibration values and the present
carryback weight value. The values of the date/time
clock stamp are reset with the same information.

Illustration 77

g00511669

44
Systems Operation Section

To view the first item again, press the > key.


Note: The format of the time/date information is
listed here:
HH:MM Hours:Minutes
MM:DD:YY Month/Day/Year
Illustration 79

Check the Weigh Range


Access to the check weigh range function is gained
through the VIMS/LPS menus. The weighing range
of the lift arc is adjustable. The operator can check
the present weigh range setting. The operator can
check the location of the lift arm relative to the
present weigh range. All of the values are displayed
as percentages in the range from 0 percent bucket
on the ground to 100 percent bucket at max lift.

g00511803

The operator presses the 0 key in order to adjust


the top of the weigh range or the operator presses
the 1 key in order to adjust the bottom of the
weigh range. Press the OK in order to return to the
calibration menu. After choosing to adjust the top
of the weigh range, the following three alternating
message screens are displayed:

For example, the weighing range is currently set


between 30 percent and 80 percent. The lift arm
angle is currently at 65 percent. The message
center shows the following information:

Illustration 78

Illustration 80

g00511811

Illustration 81

g00511812

Illustration 82

g00511815

g00511670

The LIFT POS percentage on the second line is


updated automatically as the lift arm is moved.
Pressing the OK key will return the message
center to the calibration sub-menu.

Set the Weigh Range


Access to the set weigh range function is gained
through the VIMS/LPS menus. The weighing range
of the lift arc is adjustable. If necessary, the operator
can modify the present weigh range. The lift height
is measured as a percentage in the range from
0 percent bucket on the ground to 100 percent
bucket at max lift. The weigh range sub-menu
gives the operator a choice of two options. The
operator can choose to adjust the weigh range top
or the operator can adjust the weigh range bottom:

The LIFT POS percentage on the second line is


updated automatically as the lift arm is moved.
The weigh range bottom adjustment procedure is
identical with one exception. The word TOP is
replaced by the word BTM in the messages. Press
the F2 key in order to return to the weigh range
menu without any changes. Press the OK key in
order to accept the new top/bottom weigh range.
The system determines if the value is acceptable.
The new weighing range will be temporarily
displayed as percentages:

45
Systems Operation Section

Few limitations are placed on setting the weigh


range. The person that adjusts the range setting
must understand the possible effects of an improper
setup. The weighing range must be set to an area
of smooth operation in order to be effective.

Illustration 83

g00511817

Three rules govern the modification of the weigh


range:
1. The top of the weigh range must fall between
50 and 80 percent.
2. The bottom of the weigh range must fall between
30 percent and 60 percent.
3. The difference between the weight range top and
weight range bottom must be at least 20 percent.
The weigh range must conform to the rules or one
of three error messages are temporarily displayed
after pressing the OK key:

Illustration 84

g00511818

Illustration 85

g00511819

Illustration 86

g00511820

Setting the range too low The system may cause


excessive reweigh indications. The system weighing
accuracy may be degraded. Material breakout
and rapid reverse transmission shifting to forward
transmission shifting may cause the problem.
Setting the range too high Setting the weigh point
at the maximum lift high causes excessive reweigh
indication.
Setting a narrow range A narrow range limits the
number of pressure sensor samples. Limited sample
readings reduce the accuracy of the system.

Enter the Carryback Weight


Carryback weight is a weight correction value that
is subtracted from each subsequent bucket weight
in order to account for material which is stuck in
the bucket. Carryback material is weighed and
the carryback is never placed into the truck. For
example, if the load in the bucket was 30 tons and
the carryback weight was currently set to two tons,
the calculated bucket weight would be 28 tons.
Note: The carryback weight cannot cause the
calculated bucket weight to be a negative value.
If the carryback weight were set to 10 tons and
a weight of 6 tons were weighed, the calculated
bucket weight would be zero tons. The value cannot
be minus four tons.
Access to the enter carryback weight function
is gained through the VIMS/LPS menus. At
the beginning of the enter carryback weight
function, the operator is shown three alternating
help messages that describe the function of the
carryback weight value:

Illustration 87

g00512107

Illustration 88

g00512109

To exit the weigh range sub-menu, the operator


must set the range to a value that does not violate
any of the three rules. The operator may cancel the
mode with no changes by pressing F2.

46
Systems Operation Section

Enter the Calibration Weight

Illustration 89

g00512110

The help messages display four times or the


operator can stop the messages by pressing the
OK key. A two line menu display appears after
the help messages:

Illustration 90

g00512111

Press the 0 key in order to proceed with the


calibration. To exit the VIMS/LPS menu mode, press
the 1 key. To return to the calibration menu, press
the OK key. Proceeding with the change prompts
the operator to enter a new carryback weight:

The calibration weight is the weight of material in the


bucket during the last calibration. The calibration
weight is merely used as a multiplier. The load in
the bucket during calibration relates mathematically
to the calculated bucket weight and the displayed
bucket weights. For example, increasing the
present calibration weight by 10 percent increases
all subsequent weight calculations by 10 percent
and decreasing the present calibration weight
by 10 percent decreases all subsequent weight
calculations. The mathematical relationship makes
fine tuning of the payload system possible. For
example, the operator loads a truck with 110 tons of
material verified on a scale. However, VIMS/LPS
measures the truck weight as only 100 tons. This
may be caused by an improper calibration. The
measurement can be corrected by making the
calibration weight 10 percent heavier. For example,
the present calibration weight is 20 tons. Increase
the calibration weight by 10 percent up to 22.0 tons.
This will apply the desired correction.
Access to the enter calibration weight mode is
entered through the VIMS/LPS menus. A two line
menu is displayed after selection of enter calibration
weight:

Illustration 92
Illustration 91

g00512113

g00512112

The operator uses the standard LPS method for


entering data to input the new carryback weight.
The new carryback weight value is subtracted from
all future calculations of the bucket weight.

Press the 0 key in order to proceed with the


calibration. To exit the VIMS/LPS menu mode, press
the 1 key. To return to the calibration menu, press
the OK key. Proceeding with the change prompts
the operator to enter a new cailbration weight:

Note: The value of the present carryback weight


and the date/time of the last modification can be
viewed on the message center. Refer to the System
Operations, Check the Calibration Information
section of this manual for details about viewing data.
Illustration 93

g00512121

The operator uses the standard LPS method for


entering data to input the new calibration weight.
The new calibration weight value is used for all
future calculations of thebucket weight.

47
Systems Operation Section

Note: The value of the present calibration weight


and the date/time of the last modification can be
viewed on the message center. Refer to the System
Operations, Check the Calibration Information
section of this manual for details about viewing data.

Press the 5 key for the START NEW CALIB:

Start a New Calibration


VIMS/LPS requires calibration before accurate
payload measurements can be made. Calibration
involves lifting the empty bucket several times and
lifting a calibration weight several times. Calibration
instructions for the operator are displayed on the
message center. The calibration can be broken into
seven overall steps. The steps define seven pieces
of information to VIMS/LPS:

Illustration 95

g00512541

Press the 0 key for the START NEW CALB


sub-menu:

1. Define the lift range of the boom.


2. Empty bucket 10 point lift
3. Empty bucket continuous lift.

Illustration 96

4. Enter the calibration weight.

1. Defining the Lift Range of the Boom

5. Loaded bucket 10 point lift

g00512542

The following position points will be defined in


Step 1:

6. Loaded bucket continuous lift

Upper position of the boom during normal

7. Velocity compensation 5 lifts

operation

Although the calibrated weight is not needed until


Step 4 the calibrated weight should be readily
available. Turning OFF the machine in the middle
of the calibration routine cancels the calibration.
The operator must start the calibration from the
beginning, if the machine is shut OFF. The system
will return to using the values from the previously
completed calibration.
There is no need to have a known calibration weight
while the initial calibration is performed. However,
the calibration weight will need to be measured after
the initial calibration is completed. The measured
weight of the calibration weight will need to be
entered through the update calibration menu or
inaccurate payloads will result.
Press the F1 key in order to bring up the payload
menu. Use the > key to scroll forward through the
menu items. Press the 5 key for the CALIBRATE
PAYLOAD menu.

Lower position of the boom during normal


operation

The position points are used to determine a


smaller range. The smaller range is defined as
the lift zone. The initial calibration actually starts
at this point.
a. The calibration should begin with an empty
bucket. The operator is instructed to empty
the bucket of all materials. Then press the
OK key.

Illustration 97

g00512543

b. The VIMS/LPS needs to verify the 0 percent


bucket on the ground and 100 percent
bucket at max lift points. The operator is
instructed to lift the arm to the highest point
in order to obtain the information. Then press
the OK key.
Illustration 94

g00512539

48
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 98

g00512544

c. The operator is then instructed to lower the lift


arm to the ground. Then press the OK key.

Illustration 102

g00512569

d. Steps 2.a through 2.d will be repeated ten


times at ten different lift heights.
3. Empty Bucket Continuous Lift
In Step 3, a collection of empty bucket pressure
samples are taken over the full lift in order to
calculate the empty bucket lifting calibration
curve.

Illustration 99

g00512545

a. The operator is instructed to lower the bucket


fully to the ground:

2. Empty Bucket 10 Point Lift


During Step 2, the VIMS LPS collects data at 10
stationary empty bucket pressure position points
that are required in order to calculate the empty
bucket stationary calibration curve. The operator
is asked to tilt the bucket back. The operator is
then asked to slowly lift the bucket. The system
will ask the operator to stop the bucket at ten
different points. The procedure is listed here:
a. The operator is instructed to tilt the bucket
back fully:

Illustration 103

b. The operator is then instructed to tilt the


bucket back fully:

Illustration 104
Illustration 100

g00512566

g00512566

b. Next, the operator is instructed to raise the


bucket slowly:

Illustration 101

g00512570

c. Next, the operator is instructed to lift the load.


The operator is then instructed to pull back
the lift lever fully until the STOP LIFTING
message appears. The procedure is listed
here:

g00512567

c. The operator will be instructed to stop lifting:

Illustration 105

g00512571

49
Systems Operation Section

d. Maintain engine RPM at high idle. Throttle


lock may be used to set the speed. Lift the
load smoothly. Pull back the lift lever fully:

Table 12

Approximate Calibration Pipe Weights


Model

Illustration 106

Diameter and
Length

Weight

992G

1.83 m 3.05 m
(6 ft 10 ft)

18704 kg (41235 lb)


20.6 Ton

994
994D

1.83 3.05 m
(6 ft 16 ft)

28150 kg (62060 lb)


31 Ton

g00512573

e. Stop lifting when the STOP LIFTING


message appears.
Note: Stop BEFORE the lift arm hits the physical
stops.

Illustration 109
Illustration 107

g00512576

g00513089

Refer to the Approximate Calibration Weight Table for dimensions.


(A)Diameter. (B)Length

f. Repeat Steps 3.a through 3.e until the


following message is displayed:

Illustration 108

g00512577

4. Enter the Value Of the Calibrated Weight.


In Step 4, the calibration weight is required to
be in the bucket. The calibration weight may
be fabricated from a concrete or a steel tube
of the specified diameter for the given model
and filled with concrete. The calibration weight
must be weighed on a certified scale in order to
determine the exact weight. Alternately, a load
of dirt or rock of unknown weight may be used
for the calibration.

Illustration 110

g00512687

Removing the calibration weight from the holder

a. The operator is instructed to load the


calibration weight. Then press the [OK] key.

Illustration 111
Calibration weight in the bucket

g00512688

50
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 112

g00512578

b. VIMS/LPS will ask the operator if the


calibration weight is known or unknown.

Illustration 113

g00512579

Illustration 115

c. When the value of the calibration weight is


known the operator presses the 0 key. The
operator uses the Enter Calibration Weight
function in order to enter the known calibration
weight value.
In this example, the operator enters the value
217. Then press the OK key.

g00512582

Note: The VIMS/LPS calibration will be unaffected if


an unknown calibration weight is used.
5. Loaded Bucket 10 Point Lift
In Step 5, VIMS LPS will sample ten stationary
pressure position points in order to calculate the
loaded bucket calibration curve.
a. The operator is asked to tilt the bucket back
fully:

Illustration 114

g00512580

d. If the calibration weight value is unknown the


operator presses the 1 key. A value of 20
English tons is assumed as the calibration
weight. The operator is instructed to weigh
the calibration load after the calibration is
complete. The Enter Calibration Weight
function is then used in order to enter the
correct value of the calibration weight. A
series of messages are used to inform
the operator. The messages are repeated
four times. The operator can also stop the
messages by pressing the OK key. The
messages are listed here:

Illustration 116

g00512566

b. The operator is then instructed to slowly raise


the bucket:

Illustration 117

g00512567

c. The system will instruct the operator to stop


lifting:

51
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 118

g00512569

d. Steps 5.a through 5.c will be repeated ten


times.

Illustration 122

g00512573

e. Stop lifting when the STOP LIFTING


message appears.
Note: Stop BEFORE the lift arm hits the physical
stops.

6. Loaded Bucket Continuous Lift


In Step 6, VIMS/LPS collects bucket pressures
samples over the full lift in order to calculate the
loaded bucket lifting calibration curve.
a. The operator is instructed to lower the bucket
fully to the ground:

Illustration 123

g00512576

f. Repeat Step 6.a through Step 6.e until the


following message is displayed.

Illustration 119

g00512570

b. The operator is then instructed to tilt the


bucket back fully:

Illustration 124

g00512577

7. Velocity Compensation 5 lifts

Illustration 120

g00512566

c. Next, the operator is instructed to lift the load.


Then pull back the lift lever fully until the
STOP LIFTING message appears. The load
lift is repeated in order to ensure consistency.
The process is listed here:

Illustration 121

In Step 7, the lifting velocity compensation


calibration curve is calculated. The operator is
instructed to perform five additional loaded lifts.
The loaded lifts are performed at the following
engine speeds: 1650 RPM, 1550 RPM, 1450
RPM, 1350 RPM, and 1250 RPM. Again, throttle
lock may be used to set the engine speed.
a. The operator is instructed to lower the bucket
fully to the ground:

g00512606

Illustration 125

d. Maintain engine RPM at high idle. Lift the load


smoothly. The operator is then instructed to
pull back the lift lever fully.

g00512570

52
Systems Operation Section

b. Next, the operator is instructed to lift the load.


The operator is then instructed to pull the lift
lever fully until the STOP LIFTING message
appears. In order to ensure consistency, the
loaded lift is repeated. The process is listed
here:

The following message will be shown on the


message center after completing the five
loaded lifts.

Illustration 130

Illustration 126

g00512608

c. Maintain the engine RPM at the specified


value. lift the load smoothly. The operator is
then instructed to pull back the lift lever fully.

g00512610

The calibration is now complete. The previous


calibration has been replaced. The carryback
weight is set to zero. The date/time stamps under
the Check Calibration Info function are all set
to the present time. The VIMS/LPS calibration
sub-menu is displayed on the message center.
Recalibration should not be required for 6 to 12
months.
Recalibration is required when one of the following
events occurs:

Replacement of the VIMS main module


Illustration 127

g00512609

A position sensor is adjusted.

d. Stop lifting when the STOP LIFTING


message appears.
Note: Stop BEFORE the lift arm hits the physical
stops.

A position sensor is replaced.


A lift cylinder pressure sensor is replaced.
Replacement of the bucket
Replacement of the lift arms

Illustration 128

g00512576

e. Repeat Step 7.a through Step 7.d until the


following message is displayed.

Illustration 129

g00512577

f. Repeat Step 7. Using the five previously


stated engine speeds.

53
Systems Operation Section

i01488036

Truck Payload System (TPS)


General Information
SMCS Code: 7494; 7601

g00773228

Illustration 131
Block Diagram of the VIMS Off Highway Truck Payload System

The Truck Payload System is a subsystem of the


Vital Information Management System (VIMS). The
Truck Payload System performs the functions that
are listed below:

The data that is stored by the Truck Payload System


for each payload cycle is listed below:

Calculate payload information.

Start time of the cycle

Store payload information.

Start date of the cycle

Display payload information.

Payload weight

54
Systems Operation Section

Note: This data serves as a continuous data logger.


The data can often be used to indicate the trucks
operation when a data logger file does not exist.
This provides the information that is listed below:

Loading time
Empty time
Loaded time
Loaded travel time

Whenever the physical configuration of the


truck has been changed, the manual calibration
procedure that represents an empty truck must be
used. The replacement of the suspension cylinders
is an example of a condition that would require the
manual calibration procedure.
Automatic recalibration of an empty truck occurs
when an empty truck has stopped in order to
compensate for a condition that affects the empty
weight of the truck. Conditions that can affect the
empty weight of a truck are listed here: carryback
and the amount of fuel that is on board.

Empty travel distance


Loaded travel distance

Some parameters can be modified with the service


tool in order to support a wide range of machine
configurations.

Onboard memory can store information from 2400


payload cycles (9.0X or later classes of onboard
software and 1200 cycles with onboard software
prior to 9.0X). The onboard payload data can be
downloaded to the service tool with VIMS-PC for
further analysis. After a successful download, the
onboard payload data can be reset.

Information such as total number of loads hauled


and total weight hauled can be displayed on the
message center. The totals can be reset by the
operator via the keypad. Resetting the totals prior to
shift change is an example of this function.

Payload weight data can also be broadcast via a


user supplied radio telemetry system. If telemetry
has been enabled, the calculated payload weight
will be broadcast under the following conditions:

Each detected loader pass


A truck has travelled loaded for a distance that
is greater than .16 km (0.1 miles) .

Information about the complete cycle is also


available to broadcast at the end of the payload
cycle.
Present load cycle information is displayed on the
message center. The calculated payload weight
is displayed automatically during loading. The
operator is instructed via the message center to
perform one of the following actions that is listed
here:

Continue loading loading the truck. (The loader


operator should apply additional loader passes.)

The truck is fully loaded.


The operator can access various payload
parameters via the gauge key on the keypad at
any time during the load cycle.
Payload status lamps provide feedback to the
loader operator during the loading operation. The
lamps indicate whether loading should continue, or
that the truck is fully loaded. The payload status
lamps tend to minimize the amount of under-loading
and overloading that is done in the truck fleet.

i01488191

TPS Component Function


SMCS Code: 7494; 7601
The VIMS Truck Payload System is composed of
the following components. A functional description
is included for each component.
VIMS Main Module The VIMS main module is the
brain of the Truck Payload System. All computing
and storage of the cycle data takes place in the
VIMS main module.
Message Center Module The Truck Payload
System uses the message center to display the
calculated weight of the payload. Text messages on
the message center tell the truck operator when the
target payload weight has been reached.
Keypad Module The keypad is the operator
interface with VIMS. The operator can perform the
following VIMS Truck Payload System functions with
the keypad:

Change the display units. The payload information


can be displayed in English units or Metric units.

Modify the target payload weight of the truck.


Turn ON the last pass indication.
Turn OFF the last pass indication.

55
Systems Operation Section

Enter an operator identification number or a pit


identifier of the load.

Calibrate the system.


Clear resettable totals.
VIMS Interface Modules The VIMS interface
modules receive input signals and processes input
signals from the four suspension cylinder pressure
sensors. The interface module converts the payload
signals into a digital equivalent value. The interface
module then passes the information to the VIMS
main module. The VIMS main module uses the
information in the Truck Payload System.
Suspension Cylinder Pressure Sensors The four
suspension cylinder pressure sensors converts the
payload into a signal that is proportional to weight.
This signal is then passed to the interface modules.
Payload Status Lamps The payload status lamps
are located on both sides of the truck. The payload
status lamps show the loader operator when the
target payload weight has been reached. The
VIMS Truck Payload System allows the operator to
configure the payload status lamps to indicate the
last pass. The payload status lamps will illuminate
the following colors.

A green lamp signals the loading tool to

External Payload Display The external payload


display is a 356 mm 686 mm (14 inch 27 inch)
screen. The external payload display is mounted
on the side of the truck. The external payload
display provides the operator of the loading tool
with the measured weight of the material that is
currently in the body of the truck. The payload
information is displayed in 254 mm (10 inch) red
digital numbers. There are three configurations of
the external payload display that are available.
These configurations are listed below:

Dual Displays (right hand and left hand displays)


Right Display (right hand display)
Left Display (left hand display)
The external payload display receives data through
the VIMS broadcast (system telemetry) port. There
are two modes of operation. The modes of operation
are listed below:
Single Mode This mode is for machines that are
not equipped with a radio telemetry system.
Passive Mode This mode is for machines that are
equipped with a radio telemetry system. This mode
allows the display to access data for the payload
weight without interfering with the operation of the
radio telemetry system.

continue loading the truck.

A flashing red lamp tells the loader operator

that one additional pass is required to load the


truck to capacity.

A steady red lamp signals that the target payload


weight has been reached.

Transmission Control Module The transmission


control module converts the following conditions
into a digital equivalent value: body position, ground
speed, transmission gear, and parking brake.
The transmission control module then passes the
information to the VIMS main module over the CAT
data link for use by the VIMS payload system.
Engine Control Module The engine control
module calculates fuel flow. The control converts
this data into a digital equivalent value. The engine
control module then passes the information to the
VIMS main module over the CAT data link for use
by the VIMS payload system.
i01488297

TPS On-Board Features


SMCS Code: 7494; 7601
1. Calculate payload cycle information and store
the payload cycle information.
a. Time stamp: The Date/time that marks the
start of the payload cycle.

Illustration 132

g00771922

b. Payload: The weight of the material that is


being moved

56
Systems Operation Section

c. Loading Time: The amount of time that is


required to load the truck

a. Set the maximum payload weight.


b. Turn on/off last pass indicators.

d. Loading Time: The amount of time that is


required to load the truck
e. Stopped Empty Time: The total time that
is recorded for a truck that is stopped while
emptyduring the payload cycle
f. Traveling Empty Time: The total time that
is recorded for a truck that is travelling while
emptyduring the payload cycle
g. Travel Empty Distance: The total distance
travelled by the truck while the truck was
empty.
h. Stopped Loaded Time: This is the time that
is recorded when a truck with a full load is not
moving during the payload cycle.

c. Turn on the Maximum Payload Speed


Manager. Turn off the Maximum Payload
Speed Manager.
d. Set the event limits for the Road Analysis
Control (RAC).
6. Display payload information on the message
center as the truck is being loaded.
a. Payload weight
b. Loading status messages
7. Display loading status information with the
payload status lamps as the truck is being
loaded.

i. Traveling Loaded Time: This is the time that


is recorded when a truck with a full load is
moving during the payload cycle.

a. Loading

j. Transmission Shifts: This is the total number


of transmission shifts up or down that were
made during the payload cycle.

c. Fully loaded

k. Fuel Used: This is the total fuel that is used


during the payload cycle.
l. Operator ID: This is the identification number
of the operator that had dumped the load
for that payload cycle. The operator must
enter this number into the VIMS via the VIMS
keypad module.
2. Calculate resettable totals and store resettable
totals.

b. Last pass

8. The following payload information is made


available to broadcast:
a. Loader pass count
b. Last pass indicator
c. Cycle data
9. Calculate the parameters (per payload cycle)
and then display the parameters that are listed
here:
a. Payload weight

a. The total number of loads that were hauled


since the last reset
b. The total weight that was hauled since the
last reset
c. Total travel distance since the last reset
d. Total travel time since the last reset
3. Provide a way to download onboard information
to the off-board system for analysis.
4. Provide a way to calibrate the system via the
VIMS keypad module.
5. Provide a way to configure the system to specific
requirements of the user.

b. Payload status (travelling, empty, etc.)


c. Haul distance.
10. Automatically adjust for the weight of an empty
truck as operating conditions change.
a. Fuel level
b. Carryback that is in the body of the truck or
carryback that is stuck to the underside of
the machine
11. Detect incorrect suspension cylinder charge
(collapse) and cause an appropriate event.

57
Systems Operation Section

i01488300

TPS Off-Board Features


SMCS Code: 7494; 7601
The features that are listed here take place with
VIMSpc99.
1. Provide a way to download the data that is stored
in the onboard system.
2. Provide a way to calibrate the onboard system.
3. Provide a way to view payload related
information in real time.
4. Provide a way to later analyze the data that is
downloaded from the onboard system:
a. VIMSpc99

4. When all of the loader passes have been applied,


the truck pulls away from the loading area.
When the truck reaches the speed of 5 km/h
(2 mph) or travels 0.16 km (0.1 miles) the truck is
considered to be in the travelling loaded state.
5. As the truck reaches the dumping area the
truck may need to wait because the dumping
area may be blocked by other trucks that are
dumping loads. The truck is considered to be
stopped loaded during this time. The dumping
area will eventually be clear. The truck will then
be positioned for dumping. The truck is again
considered to be travelling loaded during this
positioning. The truck is considered to be in the
dumping state when the body is raised in order
to start dumping. The truck stays in the dumping
state until the truck body is completely lowered.
During this phase of the dumping cycle, the
VIMS considers the truck to be stopped loaded.

b. VIMS Supervisor

6. Once the body is lowered the present payload


cycle ends and a new cycle begins.

c. Data may be exported to a commercial


spreadsheet of the users choice.

Basic Loading and Weighing

i01488304

TPS Normal Operation


SMCS Code: 7494; 7601

General Description of the Payload


Cycle
A new payload cycle starts when the truck finishes
dumping the previous payload and the body is fully
down.
1. After the previous payload has been dumped the
truck travels back to the loading area. The truck
is considered to be travelling empty during this
time. The truck may need to wait if the loading
area is blocked by other trucks that are being
loaded. The truck is considered to be stopped
empty in this case. When the loader is ready,
the truck is positioned under the loader. The
truck is still considered to be travelling empty
during this positioning.
2. The truck is considered to be in the Loading
state after the truck has come to a complete
stop under the loader and the first load hits the
body. The truck remains in the Loading state
until the truck has shifted into second gear.
3. The loader will begin loading material onto the
truck. As the loader passes are applied, the
truck continues to be in the loading state.

Calculating the weight of the payload begins as


material is being loaded onto the truck. The truck
must be ready to load for the weighing process
to begin. The following conditions must be met in
order to provide optimum accuracy:

The minimum weight of the loader pass must be


greater than 10 tons.

The truck must not be moving.


The transmission should be in neutral.
Setting the parking brake is recommended.
The message center will be in the background
mode and the external payload status lamps are
off. The external payload display (if equipped) will
display the current payload weight.
When the loader dumps the first pass onto the truck
body, the suspension cylinder pressure increases
sharply. The sharp increase in pressure starts
the loading state. The following information is
shown on the message center which replaces the
background mode:

A payload weight of zero


The status of LOADING
The external payload status lamps signal the loader
operator with a green light to continue loading.

58
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 133

g00490540

The pressure within the suspension cylinders is not


stable for a few seconds after the loader pass.
The suspension cylinders are still recoiling from
the sudden application of a large mass. After the
pressure in the suspension cylinders has stabilized,
the first pass weight is calculated. The pass weight
is then displayed on the message center. The
message is shown below. The external payload
status lamps continue to signal the loader operator
with a green light.

If the last pass indicator is enabled the VIMS


Truck Payload System calculates a running total of
the weight for all passes. The red payload status
lampsbegin to flash in order to warn the loader
operator when the system has determined that
one additional pass will result in a payload of at
least 95 percent of the target payload. This is the
present payload weight plus the weight of the most
recent pass. The following message is shown on
the message center:

Illustration 136

g00490542

Note: NNN.N represents the present payload weight.


After the final loader pass (the last pass) has been
completed, the red payload status lamps are turned
ON solid in order to inform the loader operator that
the present payload weight is greater than 95% of
the target payload weight. The following message
is shown on the message center:
Illustration 134

g00490541

Note: NNN.N represent the present payload weight.


With each additional loader pass, more material is
loaded onto the truck. This causes the suspension
cylinder pressures to increase sharply. Each sharp
increase in suspension cylinder pressure adds
another loader pass. The pressure within the
suspension cylinders must stabilize before the
calculation of the payload weight is completed. The
new payload weight is displayed on the message
center. This message is shown below.

Illustration 137

g00490544

Note: NNN.N represents a value that is greater


than 95% of the target payload weight that was
programmed into VIMS with the service program
code PAYCONF.
When the truck begins to travel away from the
loading site after being loaded the following
message is shown on the message center:

Illustration 135

g00490541

Note: NNN.N represent the present payload weight.

Illustration 138

g00490546

Note: NNN.N represents the last calculated payload


weight.

59
Systems Operation Section

The payload measurement system measures the


weight of the load again once the truck has exited
the load site. The measurement is made when the
truck has shifted into second gear. The payload
information automatically disappears from the
message center after the load has been measured.
The message center then returns to the background
mode. This indicates that the loading state is
complete. The truck is now travelling loaded.

Automatic Payload Communication


When the VIMS RS-232 Broadcast port is connected
to a telemetry system, the VIMS Truck Payload
System will send the payload weight via wireless
communications to an off-board site. The payload
weight is sent at the following key points in the
payload cycle:

Immediately after the VIMS has successfully

Automatic Calibration Adjustment


Whenever the truck is stopped empty the VIMS
truck Payload System will automatically adjust the
calibration. The calibration is adjusted for weight
variations such as fuel load and carryback weight
that may affect accuracy. The Carryback weight
includes any material that is stuck to the body
and under the body. The amount of adjustment
that can take place is limited to a relatively small
range around the original calibration value that was
established with the service program code PAYCAL.

Collapsed Suspension Cylinder


Detection
Whenever the truck is travelling empty at a
speed less than 12 km/h (7 mph) the system
will continuously monitor the suspension cylinder
pressure. The front and rear suspension cylinders
are monitored in pairs. An event is displayed when
the pair of suspension cylinders do not respond to
the changes in pressure equally for an accumulated
time of two minutes. The event indicates that the
suspension cylinder may be charged incorrectly or
the suspension cylinder is collapsed. For example,
when the VIMS detects a problem with the left
front suspension cylinder, the following message
is shown:

weighed each loader pass. This is true only if the


last pass indicator is on.

Immediately after the VIMS has estimated the


weight of each loader pass.

The truck travels in the loaded state for a distance


that is greater than .16 km (0.1 miles) or the truck
has shifted to 2nd gear.

Immediately after the truck has finished the


loading cycle.

Off-Board Communication
The payload information is stored in the VIMS
electronic control module during operation of the
truck. The payload information that is stored in
the on board memory can be analyzed after the
information is downloaded. The process of moving
data from the onboard memory to the off-board
service tool is called downloading.
A service tool (laptop computer) that is running the
VIMSpc99 off-board software is used in order to
download the payload information. The service tool
is connected to the onboard system via a RS-232
service port. The downloaded payload information
can be analyzed with the VIMSpc99 off-board
software.
Note: Refer to the VIMSpc99 User Manual,
FEBJ0047 for additional information on the
VIMSpc99 off-board software.

Illustration 139

g00490547

Press the F1 key for more information. For


example, the second line of the message center will
display additional diagnostic information:

While the service tool is connected to the onboard


system, VIMSpc99 can display payload information
in real-time. Payload information such as payload
weight, suspension cylinder pressures, payload
status and more can be displayed at the same
time. The payload information is updated once per
second.
Additionally, VIMSpc99 can be used to initiate a
calibration (the service program code PAYCAL) of
the VIMS Truck Payload System while the service
tool is connected.

Illustration 140

g00490548

60
Systems Operation Section

i01382827

TPS Service Operation


SMCS Code: 7494; 7601

The following information describes the service


program code 729225 (PAYCAL). The PAYCAL
service program code uses the following procedure
in order to calibrate the VIMS Truck Payload System:
1. Ensure that the truck body is empty. Carryback
will affect payload measurement.

Payload Calibration
The payload system must be calibrated if the
VIMS-PC software is used to assign a new serial
number to the main module. The payload system
must also be calibrated after the replacement of
the VIMS backup battery (disconnect switch open),
the VIMS main module, the interface module, the
suspension cylinders, the suspension cylinder
pressure sensors, etc.
Security
1. This service program code only functions while
the service tool (VIMSpc99) is connected.

2. Operate the empty truck to a minimum ground


speed of four mph on hard level ground.
3. Move the transmission gear selector to the
neutral position and allow the truck to coast to
a stop. DO NOT use the service brakes or the
retarder.
4. Manually calibrate the payload system by
entering the service program code 729225
(PAYCAL). One of the following two messages
will now show on the message area:

2. After the service tool (VIMSpc99) is disconnected


for 30 seconds, this service program code will
no longer be active.
Calibrate the pre-9.5X onboard software after
replacing the VIMS main module software. The 9.5X
and/or later onboard software will alert the user
through the message center if the software loses
the calibration data for any reason. The following
message display is shown on the message center.

Illustration 141

g00490352

Press the F1 key in order to access additional


information.

Illustration 143

g00490356

If the above message is shown, put the truck back


into service.

Illustration 144

g00490360

If the above message is shown, repeat the


procedure again. Begin at Step 1. Make sure that
the ground speed is at a minimum of four mph. DO
NOT use the service brakes and/or the retarder.

Payload Configuration
The following information describes the service
program code: 7292663 (PAYCONF)
Illustration 142

g00490354

The VIMS Truck Payload System will not operate


until a successful payload calibration has been
completed.

The service program code 7292663 (PAYCONF) is


used in order to configure the maximum weight of
the truck payload and the last pass indicator.
Security
1. This service program code only functions while
the service tool (VIMSpc99) is connected.

61
Systems Operation Section

2. After the service tool (VIMSpc99) is disconnected


for 30 seconds, this service program code will
no longer be active.

This service program code 868 (TOT) allows the


operator to view information. The service program
code allows the operator to reset the total payload
activity information since the last reset.

Procedure
Procedure
1. Stop the truck and verify that the body is empty.
Then, enter 7292663 (PAYCONF) and press the
OK key. The message area will show the target
payload weight.

1. Enter the service program code 868. Press the


OK key. The message area will show:

Illustration 147
Illustration 145

g00490429

g00583038

Note: NNN is the maximum payload weight. The


weight is displayed in the selected units of measure
(English/Metric).

Note: NNNNN represents the number of loads that


were hauled since the previous reset.
2. Press the right arrow key. The message area
will show:

2. Use the right/left arrows keys in order to set the


desired weight.
3. Press the OK key in order to accept the value
that is shown on the message center. The
message area will now show:

Illustration 148

g00490430

Note: NNNNN is the total weight of all loads that


were hauled since the previous reset.

Illustration 146

g00490392

Note: YES might also show as a NO. To enable


the LAST PASS indication, use the left/right arrow
keys to toggle the LAST PASS indicator to YES.
The continuous flashing of the RED payload status
lamps indicates that the truck is waiting for the last
pass of the loading tool. The last pass indicates
that the VIMS loader payload system has estimated
that the next pass is greater than 90 percent of the
selected target weight.
4. Press the OK key in order to accept the
selection. This returns the message center to the
previous mode.

Payload Show/Reset Resettable


Totals
The following information describes the service
program code: 868 (TOT)

3. Press the right arrow key. The message area


will show:

Illustration 149

g00583043

Note: NNNNN.N is the total miles (kilometers) that


were travelled since the previous reset.
4. Press the right arrow key. The message area
will show:

62
Systems Operation Section

Operation of the Maximum Payload


Speed Manager

Illustration 150

g00583040

Note: NNN.N represents the total travel time that


has accumulated since the last reset. Travel time
accumulates when the truck has been travelling at
a speed that is greater than 5 km/h (3 mph).
5. Press the left arrow key in order to scroll back
through the previous screens or press the OK
key in order to return the message area to
the previous mode without clearing the totals.
Proceed to Step 6 to clear the totals.
6. Enter the service program code 73738 (RESET).
Press the OK key in order to clear all the totals.
Press the OK key again in order to return the
message area to the previous mode.
i01382793

TPS Maximum Payload Speed


Manager
SMCS Code: 7494; 7601
Caterpillars 10/10/20 rule states that no more
than 10 percent of the payloads may exceed 1.1
times the target payload of the truck and no single
payload shall exceed 1.2 times the target payload of
the truck. The Maximum Payload Speed Manager
provides the customer with a way to comply with the
10/10/20 rule. This method limits the performance
of the machine. The performance of the machine is
limited when the weight of the payload is greater
than 1.2 times the target payload. When the weight
of the payload is 1.2 times the target payload, the
brakes and steering are at the maximum certifiable
levels. Limiting the performance of a machine that
is overload protects the machine and the operator.
The operator of the loading tool is also forced to
load the machine correctly.

The Maximum Payload Speed Manager compares


the actual payload weight on the machine to an
overload setting. When the VIMS has determined
that the machine is overloaded, the machine is
slowed down by limiting the shift range of the
transmission and the engine speed is reduced at
the limited gear. The payload weight is monitored
as the machine shifts to second gear.

63
Systems Operation Section

Machine Response to the Weight of the


Payload
Table 13

Conditions and the Corresponding Response


of the Machine
Condition

Response

The weight of the payload


is within the specified limit
for the target payload.

No action is taken. The


machine will continue
normal operation.

The weight of the payload


is greater than the specified
Target Payload Setting but
less than the specified
Percent Above Payload
target.

A machine overload event


is recorded.
A machine overload event
is broadcast via a radio
telemetry system.
The VIMS displays
messages to the operator.
These messages warn
the operator that the
machine is overloaded
and the messages instruct
the operator to proceed
carefully.

Weight of the payload is


greater than the specified
Percent Above Payload
Overload Limit .

An event is recorded for


the machine overload limit.
The event for the machine
overload limit is broadcast
via a radio telemetry
system.

The Maximum Payload Speed Manager will activate


the overload events when the weight of the payload
exceeds the set limit regardless of the location of
the truck. The speed limiting of the machine is
activated when the weight of the payload exceeds
the set limit regardless of the location of the truck.
This behavior will remain active until the payload is
dumped and the weight of the payload is cleared.
The limiting of the machine speed and the VIMS
messages cease automatically after the payload
has been dumped. The machine is then returned
to normal operation.
The weight of the payload is calculated when the
truck is shifted into second gear (second gear
weighing). The new weight of the payload that is
determined during the second gear weighing is
then used to determine if limiting the speed of the
machine is necessary.
Once the Maximum Payload Speed Manager has
determined that the truck is overload, the following
actions are initiated:

The shift range of the transmission is limited to


second gear.

High idle of the engine is limited to 1750 rpm.


The point for automatic retarding is reduced to
1750 rpm.
The settings that are listed above are not adjustable.

The VIMS displays warning


messages to the operator
that the machine is
overloaded.

Example of the Operation of the Maximum


Payload Speed Manager

A category 2-S warning


sounds if the operator
proceeds without
correcting the overload
condition.

The Project Manager of a site has decided that


the normal haul weight for a 793C is 240 tons. The
Project Manager has decided that the 793C should
never exceed a limit of 288 tons. In order to achieve
these objectives the Project Manager would set the
parameters of Maximum Payload Speed Manager
to the values that are listed below:

The VIMS displays warning


messages to the operator
that machine operation has
been limited and the VIMS
instructs the operator
to resolve the overload
condition.

Target Payload Setting 240 tons


Payload Overload Limit Setting 120%
(288/240=120%)

The shift range of the


transmission is limited.

With these settings the Maximum Payload Speed


Manager will function in the manner that is listed
below:

High idle of the engine is


limited.

The payload loading lamps will load to 240 tons.

The point for automatic


retarding is reduced.

The overload warnings will occur above 264 tons.


The engine speed will be limited to 1750 rpm in
second gear above 288 tons.

The external payload display will show the current


payload weight.

64
Systems Operation Section

g00739639

Illustration 151
Maximum Payload Speed Manager setup for a 793C Off-Highway Truck

Setup of the Maximum Payload


Speed Manager
The Maximum Payload Speed Manager requires
the user to enter information into the system. This
information is used to define the system behaviors
that are listed below:

Overload speed limiting


Overload events
Overload warnings

Target payload
The target payload setting is used during payload
operations in order to control the operation of
the external payload lamps. The target payload
setting is adjustable from zero to the target
weight of the truck that is being setup. The target
weight is the maximum weight of payload that is
determined from the GMW of the machine. The
target payload setting is stored in the onboard
memory of the VIMS ECM. The target payload
setting is programmed via the keypad.
The service operation of Payload Configuration
(PAYCONF) is used to set this value. Refer to the
Systems Operation, Truck Payload - Configure
section of this manual for instruction on entering
this information into the system.

65
Systems Operation Section

Payload Overload Limit


The payload overload limit is the maximum
payload weight that is allowed before the VIMS
will display warning messages to the operator.
The VIMS will also limit the speed of the machine,
if the payload weight is too high. The payload
overload limit is adjustable from 105 percent to 120
percent in increments of one percent. The payload
overload limit is stored in the onboard memory of
the VIMS ECM. The payload overload limit will
allow the user to set the percentage to zero. The
system will be disabled when the percentage is
set to zero. The default setting is zero percent.
The service operation of Payload Configuration
(PAYCONF) is used to set this value. Refer to the
Systems Operation, Truck Payload - Configure
section of this manual for instruction on entering
this information into the system.

Illustration 152

g00742484

5. Click on the Connect icon (1) in the tool bar of


ET. This will establish communication with the
machine and the ET as shown in Illustration 152.

Setup Of The System


There are two methods available to enter the values
for the Target Payload Weight and the Payload
Overload Limit.
The first method utilizes the Service Program
Code (SPC) of PAYCONF (7292663). Refer to the
Systems Operation, Truck Payload - Configure
section of this manual for instruction on entering
this information into the system.
The second method is to use the Electronic
Technician software. Use the procedure that is listed
below to enter the desire values.
Electronic Technician (ET) Procedure
1. Connect the 160-0142 Data Link Cable between
the 7X-4401 Communication Adapter and the
Service Tool (ET).
2. Connect the 139-4166 Data Link Cable between
the 7X-4401 Communication Adapter and the
diagnostic connector on the machine.
3. Turn ON the service tool and open the Electronic
Technician application.
4. Turn the disconnect switch and the key start
switch to the ON position.

Illustration 153

g00742500

6. Select VIMS main from the ECM Selector


dialog box and click on the OK button. This is
shown in Illustration 153. This will display the
ECM Summary screen.

66
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 154

g00742540

1. Select the Service menu.


2. Select Configuration from the Service menu.
This will display the Configuration screen.

Illustration 155

3. Double click on the parameter that you want to


change. This will display the Change Parameter
Value dialog box.

g00742543

67
Systems Operation Section

g00742546

Illustration 156

4. Enter the new value of the parameter into the


New Value text box and then click on the
OK button. ET will prompt the user with a
confirmation message that asks Are you sure
you want to program this parameter?. Click the
Yes button if you wish to accept the change.
Note: Repeat this procedure for both Maximum
Payload Speed Manager Parameters.

Event - Configure (ESET)


The Service program Code ESET (3738) allows the
user to modify the behavior of the payload data
events that are listed below.

i00962462

TPS Accuracy
SMCS Code: 7494; 7601

Weight Measurements
The accuracy of the data that is stored by the VIMS
Truck Payload System will be within 5% on 95%
of the payloads. There are some conditions that
could affect the accuracy of the VIMS truck payload
system weighing process. Some of these conditions
are listed here:

A truck is loaded on a sloped surface that is


2916

greater than 5 percent. Accuracy will become


progressively worse as the slope becomes
greater.

2917

A suspension cylinder is not properly charged.

2915

Refer to the Systems Operation, Event - Configure


section of this manual for instruction on modifying
the payload data events.

The suspension cylinders may not cause an


event even if the charge is incorrect. However,
the weighing accuracy will be affected.
Note: Refer to the Special Instruction, SEHS9411-01,
Suspension Cylinder Servicing for information on
servicing the suspension cylinders.

Pushing down on the load with the loading tool


during the weighing process (packing the load)

68
Systems Operation Section

Moving the truck more than a distance of .16 km


(0.1 miles) in any direction between loader
passes

i01112805

Component Descriptions

Actuating the body raise lever during loading

SMCS Code: 7601

A failure to have the VIMS Truck Payload System

The Vital Information Management System (VIMS)


operates on a variety of different machines. Some
of the following electrical components may not
be installed on every machine. Configuration
software provides the VIMS main module with the
following information: type of machine and installed
onboard components. Refer to the Electrical
System Schematic in the machine Service Manual
for component locations. The Electrical System
Schematic may be used to verify the components
that are used by VIMS.

calibrated after replacing system components.

A failure to have the VIMS Truck Payload System


calibrated after any substantial changes to the
empty weight of the truck.

Using a conveyor or a continuous feed system


for loading

A truck leaves the loading site before cylinder


pressures have stabilized and the final weight has
been displayed. This will cause the VIMS Truck
Payload System to estimate the payload weight
instead of weighing the payload.

Failures that are detected by VIMS may cause


the payload weight to become inaccurate. These
failed events will be shown in the VIMS event
list.
Note: TPS accuracy is not affected by placing the
first loader pass into the truck body before the truck
comes to a complete stop under the loading tool.
This relates to the 9.3X or later classes of on board
software. The truck can be repositioned during
loading. The truck must not travel a distance that
is greater than .16 km (0.1 miles). The VIMS Truck
Payload System will consider the loading phase of
the cycle complete, when the truck has moved a
distance that is greater than .16 km (0.1 miles) in
any direction.

Time Measurements
The smallest increment of the real time clock
measurements are 1 second. The recorded times
and dates of the real time clock will aid in identifying
the causes of any unusual cycle data.

Distance Measurements
The accuracy of the distance measurement will
depend on the actual effective rolling radius of
the tires. The VIMS Truck Payload System does
not distinguish between tires of different sizes,
manufacturers or tread depth. The VIMS Truck
Payload System distance measurements are
calculated on the average tire size for each model
of truck. Distance measurements are recorded to
the nearest .16 km (0.1 miles).

Hardware
This manual describes the version 2.0 and version
3.0 of VIMS hardware. The version 2.0 hardware
relates to the original VIMS modules (main module
and interface modules) that went into production
in the third quarter1994. In the third quarter of
1996, version 3.0 hardware began production.
The version 2.0 Interface modules and version
3.0 interface modules have the same physical
appearance. Part numbers are the only way to tell
the difference. The backup battery holder for the
V2.0 main modules are located on the side of the
module. In order to access the battery, a black
knob needs to be unscrewed. V3.0 main modules
have an egg shaped cover on the top of the
module. In order to gain access to the battery, two
screws must be removed. This battery is flat with
four pin-type contacts on the bottom. An L-shaped
tool is required to pry the battery out.
All modules can be mixed and matched with the
exception of the 144-7172 VIMS Interface Module.
The 9.X or later class of onboard software must be
used with version 3.0 modules to gain all benefits
and features. The new interface modules should
not be mixed with the former interface modules on
machines that use 9.X or later class of onboard
configuration software. If an 144-7172 VIMS
Interface Module is replaced by a older version of
interface module, the interface module will function.
However, this interface module could also cause
the diagnostic type of maintenance events to be
incorrectly displayed by using old diagnostic codes
or incorrect diagnostic codes.

69
Systems Operation Section

i01306364

Main Module
SMCS Code: 7601-EK2; 7610

The VIMS operates in the LIMITED MODE when


no source software and/or configuration software
is installed in the VIMS main module. VIMS
functionality is limited until the installation of all
necessary software. Any error messages in this
mode come from a list that is contained in the
main module (ROM) regardless of software. The
main module is programmed to recognize internal
problems before installing the software. The main
module generates the error messages in order
to aid the service technician in troubleshooting
problems with the software installation process.
APPLICATION MODE is operation of the main
module after installing the source software and
configuration software. APPLICATION MODE is the
normal VIMS operating mode which follows the self
test after the key start switch is turned to the ON
position.

Illustration 157

g00568328

Machine Information Stored in the Main Module


(V3.0)
The version 3.0 main module stores the following
basic machine information in a semi-permanent
(EEPROM) type of memory. The semi-permanent
(EEPROM) memory is unchanged by flashing the
CONFIGURATION software with the exceptions that
are noted in Table 14. The configuration software
will allow some keypad commands and the service
tool to change this information.

Product Identification Number (PIN) or Serial


Number

Machine equipment or unit number


Machine hours (SMH)
Attachment code (Large Wheel Loaders and
5230 Excavator7LL99-UP)

Illustration 158

g00568367

Type of configuration

Limited Mode/Application Mode (V3.0 Hardware)

Odometer

The VIMS main module operates in one of two


modes:

Note: Refer to Table 14 for the status of machine


information after installing new onboard software.

limited

The following items are stored in battery-backed


memory:

application
Date
Time
Payload calibration (OHT and Large Wheel
Loaders)

All data files that can be downloaded


Setting of the display unit

70
Systems Operation Section

Setting of the desired language


Active events (when the key start switch is turned
to the OFF position)
Table 14

VIMS Machine Information that is Changed by the Installation of New Source Software or New Configuration Software
Machine Information

Information that is Changed by


the Installation of the Source
Software (.SRC).

Information that is Changed by the


Installation of the Configuration
Software (.CNF).

Machine Serial Number (Product


Identification Number PIN)

NO

NO

Machine Equipment Number (Unit


Number)

NO

NO

Machine Hours (SMH)

NO

NO

Attachment Code (Large Wheel loader


and 5230 Excavator7LL99-UP)

NO

NO(1)

YES(2)

YES(3)

Odometer

NO

NO

Date

NO

NO

Time

NO

NO

Payload Calibration

NO(4)

NO(4) (YES for OHT)

Data Files Available for Download

YES

YES(5)

Language Setting

YES

YES

Unit Setting

YES

YES

Active Events At The Time The Key


Start Switch is turned To The OFF
Position.

YES

YES

Autolube Setting

YES

YES

Configuration Type

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Installation of a new configuration does not change the attachment code unless there is a special code given in a configuration that is
required by that configuration.
Installation of configuration software (new or the same one) clears the configuration type.
First configuration installation after a new source software update determines the the configuration type for future uploads.
Valid with 9.5X or later classes of onboard software
Except cumulative data in 9.5X or later classes of onboard software

71
Systems Operation Section

VIMS keypad module

Table 15

Component Description of Main Module


No.

Connector(1)

Function

Other electronic control modules

Type

Internal calculations

+Battery - Unswitched (+24


DCV)(2)

Power Input
(Memory)

Frame Ground

Ground(3)

Display Back Light Return

Output

CAT Data Link (Left) +

Input/Ouput

CAT Data Link (Left) -

Input/Ouput

CAT Data Link (Right) +

Input/Ouput

CAT Data Link (Right)

Input/Ouput

+Battery - Key Switch (+24


DCV)

Input(4)

Quad gauge module

Dash Light Sensor

Sensor(5)

Speedometer/tachometer module

16

RS-232 Data Link 1 - Trans.


(Broadcast)

Output

17

RS-232 Data Link 1 - Rec.


(Broadcast)

Input

18

RS-232 Data Link 2 - Rec.


(Service)

Input

Service lamp

19

RS-232 Data Link 2 - Trans.


(Service)

Output

20

Action Lamp

Output

21

Service Lamp

Output

22

Payload Lamp (Green)

Output

23

Payload Lamp (Red)

Output

24

Action Alarm

Output

The service indicator lamp is used by the service


technician and on-site maintenance personnel.
The service indicator lamp is not visible from the
cab. The main module uses two RS-232 data link
outputs to communicate data to off-board systems.
A 37 contact connector is located on the VIMS
main module. The connector is used to connect
the necessary harness wiring to all the system
components. The module identifier (MID) for the
VIMS main module is listed here:

25

Display Power (9 DCV)

Output

26

Display Clock

Output

27

Display Data

Output

Input/Output

28

Display Load

Output

CAT Data Link

29

Keypad Data

Input

37

Display Modules Ground

Ground(6)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Message center module


Action lamp

The Main Module connector is a 37 contact connector.


Contacts not listed are unused.
This voltage is turned OFF only when the disconnect switch
is in the OFF position.
(+battery return)
This input turns ON the main module. The power is provided
via contact 1.
This is the input that is used for backlight dimming.
Return for 9 volt power.

The VIMS main module monitors the status of the


machine systems continuously. The main module
makes decisions based upon the input from the
following components:

VIMS interface modules

The main module sends information to VIMS


interface modules and other electronic control
modules on the machine. The input and output
of this information takes place over the CAT data
link. The outputs of the main module notify the
operator and the service technician of the status of
the machine systems. The VIMS machine system
information is shown on the display modules that
are listed here:

Action alarm

49 VIMS Main Module

The connector contacts of the CAT data link 4,


5, 6, and 7 on the VIMS main module, provide a
communication link with the other electronic control
modules on the machine. The CAT data link is
bidirectional. This bidirectional functionality allows
the input/output of data between electronic control
modules. The CAT data link permits the sharing of
information such as engine oil pressure, machine
codes and diagnostics. The VIMS main module can
communicate with two identical CAT data links.
The two data links are identified as the right or the
left CAT data link. The identical data links work
independently of each other. This connects the main
module in a loop with the other VIMS modules. The
loop allows the VIMS modules two possible paths of
communication. Two communication paths allow the
VIMS modules to communicate even if the loop is
broken by harness failures.

72
Systems Operation Section

RS-232 Data Link


The connector contacts of the VIMS main module
(16, 17, 18 and 19) provide two RS-232 serial ports.
The two serial ports allow the VIMS main module
to communicate with the off-board systems. The
RS-232 data links are bidirectional. The bidirectional
function allows the main module to input/output
information. One port is used to communicate with
an off-board service tool. The second port is used
in order to broadcast data to off-board systems, as
required.

The sensing input for lighting (connector contact 9)


tells the main module when the machine panel dash
lamps are ON. Harness wiring connects the panel
lamp circuits to the sensing input for lighting. The
sensing input for lighting is used to determine when
the back lighting of the message center module
should be dimmed in V2.0 hardware. The V3.0
hardware allows the operator to control backlighting
through the keypad. 9.X class of on board software
is required to adjust backlighting through the
keypad. Refer to the Systems Operation, Service
Operations section of this manual for additional
information.

Display Data Link


Keypad Input
The VIMS main module contacts 26, 27, 28 and
37 provide a serial port for the Display Data Link.
The main module uses the display data link to
communicate with the display modules. Power for
these modules (connector contact 25) is 9 Volts
relative to ground (connector 37). The 6-contact
connectors in the machine harness for any of the
display modules can be interchanged with any
other display module. This is especially helpful for
troubleshooting.
Keypad Data Link
The keypad data link (connector contact 29 and 37)
is used to provide a serial port for communicating
keypad data to the VIMS main module.
Inputs
Switch Input - Key Start Switch
The input from the key start switch (connector
contact 8) provides information about the status of
the key start switch (ON or OFF). The input signal
from the key start switch is used to turn on the main
module. When the key start switch is in the ON
position, this input is connected to +battery. When
the key start switch is in the OFF position, the input
is open (floating).
Sensing Input - System Voltage
The sensing input for system voltage (connector
contact 1) tells the main module the voltage of the
machine electrical system. harness wiring connects
the VIMS circuit breaker to this input (connector
contact 1). This voltage information helps determine
the condition of the electrical system. This input is
also the +battery supply for the VIMS main module.
This input provides power to the battery backed
up memory in the event of a failure to the internal
backup battery (3 volt) or the internal backup
battery is removed.
Sensing Input - Lighting

The keypad input (connector contact 29) receives


information from the keypad.
Outputs
Service Lamp
When a VIMS event is detected, the main module
activates the service lamp output (connector
contact 21) and the service lamp is turned ON.
The service lamp remains ON whenever the event
is active. If an event could be damaging to the
machine, the service lamp is FLASHED. The service
lamp can be turned OFF with the keypad. Events
are not cleared from the main module memory
when the service lamp is turned OFF. If the event
becomes inactive, the service lamp is turned OFF.
When power is applied to the Vital Information
Management System, the main module memory
is checked for any inactive events that have not
been cleared. If any inactive events are found, the
service lamp is FLASHED three times. If no events
are found, the service lamp is FLASHED once as a
lamp test during the VIMS self test.
If an event is acknowledged via the keypad, the
service lamp will not turn OFF. Refer to the Systems
Operation, Service Operations section of this
manual for additional information on turning off
the service lamp with the service program code
SVCLIT.
Action Lamp
The action lamp output of the main module
(connector contact 20) is activated when a category
2 or 3 warning is present and this will cause the
action lamp to FLASH. For more information, see the
Systems Operation, Warning Operation section.
Action Alarm

73
Systems Operation Section

The action alarm output of the main module


(connector contact 24) is activated when a critical
abnormal condition category 3 is present and this
will cause the action alarm to SOUND. For more
information, see the Systems Operation, Warning
Operation section.
Display Power Supply
The display power output of the main module
(connector contact 25) provides 9 volts DC power
to the following display modules:the quad gauge
module, the message center module , and the
speedometer/tachometer module. The other display
outputs of the main module connector contacts 26
through 28 provide the information that is shown
on the display modules via the Display Data Link.
These outputs are connected to all display modules.
VIMS Internal Battery

All on board stored data in V3.0 hardware (not


source or configuration software) is retained in
battery-backed memory (volatile). This type of
memory will lose data if power is removed. When
the disconnect switch is in the ON position, the
machine electrical system will power the main
module. This allows the stored data to be retained.
The backup battery takes over when the disconnect
switch is open. The backup battery retains only the
stored data.
The backup battery also powers the date/time
function in the main module when the key start
switch is in the OFF position. This is true whether
the disconnect switch is ON or OFF.
For machines in service, the backup battery is
expected to have a life of approximately two years
V2.0 hardware and the V3.0 hardware has an
expected life of approximately 5 years. Refer to
the following table for the recommended battery
replacement interval.
Table 16

Internal Battery Replacement


Hardware
Version
Illustration 159

g00481904

V2.0

Every two years(1)

V3.0

Every five years(2)

(1)

(2)

Illustration 160

g00481903

VIMS Internal Memory Backup Battery

A long life three volt lithium battery is contained


in the VIMS main module. The battery allows the
memory of the main module to hold data when
power is removed from the main module (OPEN
disconnect switch). The time/date functions are also
powered by the battery.

Recommended Battery
Replacement

Battery replacement should be performed annually in climates


with ambient temperatures in the range of 0 to 40 C
(32 to 40 F).
Battery replacement should be performed at a 2 to 3 year
interval in climates with ambient temperatures of 0 to 40 C
(32 to 40 F).

The failure of the backup battery causes an


operator warning and a resulting diagnostic code
to be stored in the event list. After the event for
the failure of the battery, if the key start switch
is put in the OFF position and the disconnect
switch is OPEN, loss of the stored data can occur
within several hours or less. When this warning
occurs, download the stored data immediately.
Then replace the backup battery. DO NOT turn
the key start switch to the OFF position. DO NOT
turn the disconnect switch to the OFF position.
The reason that the potential loss of data is so
sudden after the initial operator warning is due
to the discharge characteristics of the lithium
battery. The lithium battery holds a constant voltage
throughout the life of the battery. Then due to the
chemical breakdown (maturing) of the battery, the
battery dies very quickly. This is in contrast to the
discharge characteristics of the average flashlight
battery. The flashlight battery discharges slowly
over time, until the battery is dead.

74
Systems Operation Section

Note: When the 9X-5402 Battery is being replaced,


ensure that the insulating sleeve is removed
from the battery (if present). See the Testing and
Adjusting, Battery Replace section of this manual
for more information.
Note: The 9X-5402 Battery is used in V2.0 main
modules (3E-3666 Electronic Control, 115-0648
Electronic Control, 118-9636 Electronic Control
and 124-6134 VIMS Electronic Control Group). The
101-1785 Battery is used in V3.0 main modules
(130-5131 VIDS/VIMS Electronic Control Group
165-8682 VIDS/VIMS Electronic Control Group).
i01329228

Interface Module
SMCS Code: 7601

g00568237

Illustration 161
Table 17

(Table 17, contd)

Contact Description of Interface Module Connector(1)


No.

Function

PWM 3

Sensor Input (PWM)

Switch 1

Uncommitted
Switch Input

Switch 2

Uncommitted
Switch Input

Unused

10

PWM 4

Sensor Input (PWM)

11

PWM 5

Sensor Input (PWM)

12

Switch 3

Uncommitted
Switch Input

13

Frequency 3
Programmable

Sensor Input
(Frequency)

14

PWM 6

Sensor Input (PWM)

15

PWM 7

Sensor Input (PWM)

16

PWM 8

Sensor Input (PWM)

17

Switch 4

Uncommitted
Switch Input

18

Switch 5

Uncommitted
Switch Input

19

Switch 6

Uncommitted
Switch Input

20

Switch 7

Uncommitted
Switch Input

21

CAT Data Link


Left +

Input/Output

22

CAT Data Link


Left -

Input /Output

23

CAT Data Link


Right +

Input/Output

24

CAT Data Link


Right -

Input/Output

25

Switch 8

Uncommitted
Switch Input

26

Sensor Power (8 DCV)

Output

27

Sensor Power (5 DCV)

Output

28

Frequency 1

Sensor Input
(Frequency)

29

Frequency 2
Programmable

Sensor Input
(Frequency)

31

Solenoid 1

Driver
Output

32

Switch 9

Switch Input
24 VDC

Contact Description of Interface Module Connector(1)


No.

Function

Type

+Battery (+24 DCV)

Power Input

Ground

Ground

PWM 1

Sensor Input (PWM)

PWM 2

Sensor Input (PWM)


(continued)

Type

(continued)

75
Systems Operation Section

(Table 17, contd)

Contact Description of Interface Module

Connector(1)

No.

Type

Function

33

Solenoid 2

Driver
Output

37

Harness Code 0

Switch Input
(programming)

38

Harness Code 1

Switch Input
(programming)

39

Harness Code 2

Switch Input
(programming)

40

Harness Code 3

Switch Input
(programming)

(1)

This connector is a 40 contact connector. Contacts not listed


are unused.

The connector contacts of the CAT data link 21, 22,


23, and 24 provide a communication link with the
other electronic control modules on the machine.
The CAT data link is bidirectional. The bidirectional
functionality allows the input/output of data between
electronic control modules. The CAT data link
permits the sharing of information such as engine
oil pressure, machine codes and diagnostics. The
interface module contains two identical CAT data
links. The identical data links work independently of
each other. The two data links are identified as the
right or the left CAT data link. The interface module
is connected in a loop with the VIMS main module.
The loop provides two paths of communication for
the VIMS modules. Two communication paths allow
the VIMS modules to communicate even if the loop
is broken by harness failures.
Inputs

There may be several interface modules on one


machine. Each of these modules operate in a similar
way. Different Module Identifiers (MID) are assigned
to each module. This code is determined by the
harness code connections. The Module Identifier
(MID) for each interface module is listed here:
57 VIMS Interface Module No. 1

The inputs describe the status of the machine


systems. Switch inputs and sensor inputs are used
by the interface module. Switches and harness
wiring provide an open or ground to the switch
inputs of the interface module. Sensors (frequency
or PWM) and harness wiring provide a changing
signal to the sensor inputs of the interface module.

58 VIMS Interface Module No. 2

Switch Input (+24 DCV)

59 VIMS Interface Module No. 3

The +24 DCV switch input (connector contact 32)


monitors a +24 DCV circuit. The switch input will be
either +24 DCV or the switch input will be open or
floating. If the input is floating, a pull-down resistor
in the interface module will pull this input to ground
and the voltage will be at 0 volts.

60 VIMS Interface Module No. 4


65 VIMS Interface Module No. 5
66 VIMS Interface Module No. 6

Uncommitted Switch Inputs

67 VIMS Interface Module No. 7


68 VIMS Interface Module No. 8
Note: The Module Identifier (MID) for the VIMS main
module is No. 49.
Inputs/Outputs
CAT Data Link

The uncommitted switch inputs (connector contacts


6, 8, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20 and 25) provide the
information about the machine systems. These
inputs become dedicated to a specific function by
the configuration software. The machines Electrical
System Schematic may be used to verify the
function. The status of the switch input indicates a
normal or abnormal system condition. The switch
inputs receive machine system information from the
following types of switches:

Pressure Switches
Temperature Switches
Flow Switches
Level Switches
Position Switches
The input of the interface module is either open
(floating) or the input is connected to ground
through the switch.

76
Systems Operation Section

Switch Inputs (Harness Code)

Solenoid Output

The connector contacts 37 through 40 are the


harness code inputs. The Harness code inputs can
be used to assign a unique module identification
code to the individual interface modules. This is
necessary because there can be multiple interface
modules on one machine. The module identification
code identifies the interface module that is currently
communicating with the VIMS main module. The
combination of grounded harness code inputs and
open harness code inputsdetermine the unique
module identification code for the interface module.

The solenoid (driver) outputs connector contacts 31


and 33 allow the interface module to cause action.
An example of this action could be energizing a
solenoid or sounding the action alarm.
Voltage Output (Sensor Power)
This output provides a regulated power source to
the PWM sensors. There are two voltage outputs
on this module. A regulated +8 DCV sensor power
source connector contact 26 and a regulated +5
DCV sensor power source connector contact 27.

Sensor Inputs (Frequency)


An AC signal that usually represents the rotational
speed of a machine component is present at each
frequency sensor input, connector contacts 13, 28
and 29. The suspension cylinder pressure sensor
is the exception. The suspension cylinder pressure
sensor generates a frequency that is proportional
to the pressure in the suspension cylinder. For
example, the ground speed , the engine speed
sensor and the suspension cylinder pressure
sensors provide an AC signal of varying frequency
to the interface module. The interface module
measures the frequency (Hz) of the AC signals.
The resulting speeds are sent to the main module
over the CAT data link. The main module shows this
information on the speedometer/tachometer module.
The main module may also show this information
on the message center display. Connector contact
28 (frequency 1) is used only with a magnetic type
sensor. The pull-up voltage is zero. The functionality
of connector contacts 29 (frequency 2) and 13
(frequency 3) are programmable in the VIMS
configuration software. The configuration software
can be programmed for either magnetic sensors
(sine wave) or powered sensors (square wave). The
pull-up voltage is 7 1 DCV on frequency inputs
that are used with suspension cylinder pressure
sensors.
Sensor Inputs (PWM)
The PWM sensor inputs at connector contacts 3, 4,
5, 10, 11, 14, 15, and 16 receive PWM signals that
are representing the present condition of a machine
system. PWM sensors provide temperature,
pressure and level information of machine systems.
The interface module measures the duty cycle of
the PWM signal, which represents the measured
information. This PWM information can be sent to
the main module over the CAT data link. The main
module uses this information to monitor machine
systems. Then alert the operator of any abnormal
conditions.
Outputs

i00947611

Display Modules
SMCS Code: 7450
The contact description for all display modules are
listed in the following table.
Table 18

Contact Description of Display Module Connector


No.

(1)

Function

Type

+9 DCV

Input - Power

Ground

Ground Power/Signal

Display Clock

Input - Signal

Display Data

Input - Signal

Display Load

Input - Signal

Harness Code

Input(1)

The harness code is used to give two display modules of the


same type a unique component number. This is needed so
the VIMS main module can send unique information to each
identical module. The module number 1 is assigned to the
component with a grounded harness code input. The module
number 2 is assigned to the component with an ungrounded
harness code input.

The display modules receive information from


the main module. The operator and the service
technician are notified of machine system status
by the display modules. The display modules are
listed here:

Quad gauge module


Speedometer/tachometer module
Message center module

77
Systems Operation Section

Note: The Electrical Schematic in the machine


Service Manual and the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals are helpful in identifying the display
modules that are used on a given machine.
i01324609

Quad Gauge Module


SMCS Code: 7450

g00701010

Illustration 162
Quad Gauge Module
(1) Harness Connector

(2) Gauge warning area

This module contains four gauges. The gauge


receives the information from sensor inputs from The
VIMS or other electronic controls over the CAT data
link. The VIMS main module uses the information
from the sensor inputs in order to calculate the
values that are shown on the gauges.
Each gauge is dedicated to a parameter within a
machine system. Some examples of the possible
machine system parameters are listed here: engine
oil pressure, power train oil temperature, brake
oil temperature, brake air pressure, system air
pressure, hydraulic oil temperature, and fuel level.
Pictograph symbol (3) identifies the machine
system parameter which is shown on each gauge.
Abnormal range values are shown by the gauge
warning area (2).

(3) Pictograph symbol

78
Systems Operation Section

i01324686

Speedometer/Tachometer
Module
SMCS Code: 7450

g00701138

Illustration 163
Speedometer/Tachometer module
(1) Tachometer
(2) Pictograph symbol

(3) Ground speed readout


(4) Actual gear readout

Ground speed readout (3) consists of three digits


that may be used in order to show the machine
ground speed in MPH (km/h). The service
program code of UN is used to change the unit of
measure. The unit of measure is English or metric.
The VIMS calculates speed by using the information
from the output of a frequency sensor. The VIMS
may also calculate speed by using information that
is obtained from a different electronic control over
the CAT data link.
Actual gear readout (4) consists of two digits
that show the transmission actual gear which is
engaged. The left digit shows the actual gear that
is selected, 1, 2, 3, etc. The right digit shows
the direction that is selected, F, N or R.
Tachometer (1) shows the engine speed in RPM.
The VIMS calculates speed by using the information
from the output of a frequency sensor. The VIMS
may also calculate speed by using information that
is obtained from a different electronic control over
the CAT data link.

(5) Harness Connector

79
Systems Operation Section

i01324730

Message Center Module


SMCS Code: 7450

g00701180

Illustration 164
Message Center Module
(7) Alert Indicator
(8) Data logging indicator
(9) Message area

(10) Universal gauge


(11) Gauge warning area
(12) Harness connector

Alert indicator (7) notifies the operator of an


abnormal condition in a machine system. The main
module uses information from the interface modules
and any other electronic control modules on the
machine to determine when an abnormal condition
is present. The main module then FLASHES alert
indicator (7). When alert indicator (7) FLASHES, an
abnormal condition exists. For more information,
refer to the Systems Operation, Warning Operation
section in this manual.

(13) Backlight harness connector

The system default information is shown on the


message area during normal operation. The default
information is referred to as the background mode.
Information that is shown in the background mode
is listed here:

Time of day
Odometer (9.3X class of software or later)
Total machine hours. The total machine hours are

Data logging indicator (8) is a series of dots that


scroll when data logging is turned on. The dots
only scroll when data logging is turned on from the
keypad.
Message area (9) identifies the machine system
parameter with an abnormal condition. The first line
shows the parameter and the parameter status. The
second line prompts the operator for a reaction.
When alert indicator (7) is FLASHED, the machine
system parameter with the abnormal condition is
shown in the message area. For more information,
refer to the Systems Operation, Warning Operation
section in this manual. Message area (9) is also
used to show the event lists, active diagnostic
events (MID, CID, and FMI format) and other
requested information.

based on engine running time.

On trucks, the payload weight is the information


that is shown in the background mode when the
truck is being loaded.

On loaders, the payload weight is also the


information that is shown in the background mode
when the payload system is ON.

80
Systems Operation Section

Universal gauge (10) shows a relative value of


the parameter in message area (9). For sensor
type parameters, universal gauge (10) shows the
relative value of the event parameter. Switch type
parameters are not shown on universal gauge (10).
Universal gauge (10) can also show the RELATIVE
value of any valid machine system parameter.
The ACTUAL value can be viewed by entering
the desired parameter number on the keypad and
pressing the GAUGE key or pressing the F1 key
while the event is present.

(Table 20, contd)

Message Center Abbreviations


Basic Word

Abbreviation

AESC

AESC

Absolute

AB

Accept

ACCEPT

Accumulator

ACUM

Action

ACTION

Gauge warning area (1) is a bar that can be located


at either end of universal gauge (10). The bar that
is used is determined by the parameter that is
being displayed. Gauge warning areas (11) may
be illuminated in order to indicate an abnormal
condition. In illustration 164, gauge warning area
(11) is illuminated in order to show the abnormal
condition: TRN TEMP HI. The lower end of the
gauge would have illuminated if there was an
abnormal condition: ENG OIL PRES LO

Actuator

ACTR

Actual

ACT

Adv Diesel Eng Mmgt

ADEM

After

AFTR

Aftercooler

AFTCLR

Air

AIR

Air Horn

AIR HORN

The 133-1840 VIMS Message Center Module or


later can be adjusted for the best viewing angle
and the best backlighting intensity. However, the
machine must be equipped with the V3.0 hardware
and the 9.X class or later of onboard software to use
these advanced features. Message centers prior
to the 133-1840 VIMS Message Center Modules
allow backlight adjustment. However, 9.X software
is required. The viewing angle (contrast) cannot be
adjusted. Refer to Table 19 for additional information
on features of the message center module.

Alarm

ALARM

Ambient

AMB

Amperes

AMPS

And

AND

Angle

ANGLE

Arm

ARM

Attachment

ATTACH

Atmospheric

ATMOS

Table 19

Automatic

AUTO

Auto Lube

AUTO LUBE

AUTO Retarder Control

ARC

Auxiliary

AUX

Available

AVAILABLE

Average

AVG

Average No. 1

AVG1

Average No. 3

AVG3

Average No. 5

AVG5

Axle

AXLE

Bevel

BVL

The Message Center Abbreviations Table provides


the abbreviation for VIMS basic words.

Back

BACK

Backup

BKUP

Table 20

Battery

BATT

Between

BETWEEN

Body

BODY

Boom

BM

Features of the Message Center


Hardware

V2.0

V3.0

Onboard
Software Prior
to 9.X

9.X or Later
Onboard
Software

No contrast
or backlight
adjustment

Adjustable
backlighting only

No contrast
or backlight
adjustment

Adjustable
backlighting and
contrast

Message Center Abbreviations

Message Center Abbreviations


Basic Word

Abbreviation

A
(continued)

(continued)

81
Systems Operation Section

(Table 20, contd)

(Table 20, contd)

Message Center Abbreviations

Message Center Abbreviations

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Boost

BOOST

Component ID

CIDs

Bottom

BTM

Conditions

CONDITIONS

Bottom-Front

BTM F

Console

CONSOLE

Bottom-Right

BTM R

Continue

CONTINUE

Box

BOX

Control

CTRL

Brake

BRK

Coolant

COOL

Brake Cooler

BRKC

Cooler

COOLR

Broadcast

BROADCAST

Count

COUNT

Blocker

BLKR

Cumulative

CUM

Bucket

BKT

Current

CUR

Cab

CAB

Crank

CRANK

Calibrate

CAL

Crankcase

CNKCASE

Calibrated

CALIBRATED

Cylinder

CYL

Calibration

CAL

Cylinder Rod

CYLRD

Call

CALL

Data

DATA

Cancel

CNCL

Data Link

DATA LINK

Carry Back

CARRYBK

Data Logger

DLOGR

Case

CASE

Dead

DEAD

Case Drain

CDRN

Decelerator

DECEL

CAT

CAT

Degress Celcius

DEG C

Center

CTR

Degrees Fahrenheit

DEG F

Change

CHNG

Derate

DERATE

Channel

CHNL

Deviation

DEV

Charge

CHRG

Differ

DIFFER

Chassis Control

CC

Differential

DIFF

Check

CHECK

Digital

DIGITAL

Chip

CHIP

Direction

DIR

Circuit

CRT

Directional

DIRECTIONAL

Clear

CLR

Disabled

DISABLD

Close

CLOSE

Display

DISP

Closed

CLSD

Distance

DISTANCE

Cluster

CLUSTR

Down

DWN

Clutch

CLTCH

Downshift

DOWNSHIFT

Code

CODE

Drain

DRN

Collapsed

CLPSD

Drag

DRAG

Command

CMD

Drive

DRIVE

Communicate

COMM

Dual

DUAL

Completed

COMPLETED

Dump

DUMP

(continued)

(continued)

82
Systems Operation Section

(Table 20, contd)

(Table 20, contd)

Message Center Abbreviations

Message Center Abbreviations

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Electric Horn

ELEC HORN

Haul

HAUL

Electronic

ELEK

Head

HD

Electronic Control Module

ECM

High

HI

Elect Trans Control

EPTC

High Pressure

HIPRES

Empty

EMPTY

High Pilot (pressure)

HIPLT

Enable

ENABL

Hoist

HOIST

Engine

ENG

Hold

HOLD

English

ENGLISH

Hour

HOUR

Enter

ENTER

Hydraulic

HYD

Error

ERR

Identification

ID

Event Recorder

EREC

Impeller

IMPLR

Ether

ETHER

Idle

IDLE

Event

EVENT

Implement

IMPL

Event Configure

ESET

Incorrect

INCORRECT

Exhaust

EXH

Indicator

INDICATOR

Exit

EXIT

Inhibit

INHIB

Factor

FACTOR

Injector

INJ

Fan

FAN

Injection

INJEC

Filter

FLTR

Inlet

IN

Filtered

FLTRD

Inputs

INPUTS

Final

FNL

Interface Module

I/M

Fixed

FIXED

Intermittent

INTM

Float

FLOAT

Invalid

INVALID

Flow

FLOW

Junk

JUNK

Front

Key

KEY

Frame Equivalent Life Average

FELA

Keypad

KPAD

From

FROM

Kickout

KO

Fuel

FUEL

Known

KNOWN

Fully

FULLY

Ladder

LADDER

Function

FUNCTION

Latch

LATCH

Gauge

GAUGE

Lamp

LAMP

Gate

GATE

Last

LAST

Gear

GEAR

Left

LT

Good

GOOD

Left - Front

LTF

Green

GN

Left - Rear

LTR

Ground

GND

Level

LVL

Harness

HRNES

Lever

LVR

(continued)

(continued)

83
Systems Operation Section

(Table 20, contd)

(Table 20, contd)

Message Center Abbreviations

Message Center Abbreviations

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Lift

LFT

No

NO

Lighting

LIGHTING

Nominal

NOM

Limit

LIMIT

Not

NOT

Limited

LIMITED

Off

OFF

Link

LINK

Oil

OIL

Linkage

LNKG

On

ON

List

LIST

Open

OPEN

Load

LOAD

Operator

OPERATOR

Loaded

LOADED

Operating

OPRG

Loading

LOADING

Out

OUT

Lock

LCK

Outlet

OUT

Lockout

LCKOUT

Output

OUTPUT

Lockdown

LOCKDN

Over

OVER

Lockup

LCKUP

Overstroke

STROKE

Loss

LOSS

Parameters

PARAMETERS

Low

LO

Park

PRK

Lower

LOWER

Parking

PRKG

Lubrication

LUBE

Parking Brake

PARKBK

Machine

MACH

Pass

PASS

Machine Control

M/C

Payload

PAYLOAD

Main

MAIN

Peak

PEAK

Manual

MANUAL

Pedal

PDL

Maximum

MAX

Percent

Measure

MEASURE

Perform

PERFORM

Message

MSG

Personality

PRSNALTY

Mile

MILE

Pilot

PLT

Mismatch

MISMATCH

Pitch

PITCH

Mode

MODE

Pitch Per Second

PITCH/SEC

Modified

MODIFIED

Plugged

PLGD

Modulate

MODULATE

Port

PORT

Module

MODUL

Position

POS

Motor

MTR

Power

POWER

Moving

MOV

Power Shift

PS

Movement

MVMT

Power train

PT

Must

MUST

Prepare

PREPARE

Neutral

NTRL

Press

PRESS

Neutralizer

NTLRZR

Pressure

PRES

New

NEW

Pressure-Front

PRESF

(continued)

(continued)

84
Systems Operation Section

(Table 20, contd)

(Table 20, contd)

Message Center Abbreviations

Message Center Abbreviations

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Pressure-Rear

PRESR

Review

REVIEW

Previous

PREVIOUS

Ride

RIDE

Primary

PRI

Right

RT

Print

PRINT

Right-Front

RTF

Programmable

PROG

Right-Rear

RTR

Proportional

PROP

Rimpull

RIMPULL

Pull

PULL

Rod

RO

Pump

PMP

Run

RUN

Purge

PURGE

Scale

SCALE

Quickshift

QUICKSHIFT

Screen

SCREEN

RPM

SPD

Second

SEC

Rack

RACK

Secondary

SEC

Rack Per Second

RACK/SEC

Select

SELECT

Rackback

RKBCK

Sensor

SNSR

Raise

RAISE

Service

SERV

Range

RANGE

Set

SET

Rate

RATE

Shift

SHIFT

Rated

RATED

Shop

SHOP

Rear

Short

SHORT

Rear Inside

RI

Shorted

SHORTED

Recorder

RECORDER

Shutdown

SHUTDN

Red

RD

Signal

SIG

Reel

REEL

Slip

SLIP

Relay

RELAY

Slowly

SLOWLY

Relief

RLF

Snapshot

SNAPSHOT

Renewal

RENEWAL

Solenoid

SOL

Remote

REMOTE

Speed

SPD

Report

REPORT

Speedometer/Tachometer

SPDOM/TACH

Request

REQ

Start

START

Required

REQD

Starter

STARTER

Resolver

RESOLVER

Status

STATUS

Response

RESPONSE

Steer

STR

Restart

RESTART

Steering

STRG

Restrictor

RESTR

Steering Pump

STRPMP

Retarder

RETRDR

Stop

STOP

Retarder

RETARDER

Stroke

STROKE

Return

RTN

Subtracted

SUBTRACTED

(continued)

(continued)

85
Systems Operation Section

(Table 20, contd)

(Table 20, contd)

Message Center Abbreviations

Message Center Abbreviations

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Basic Word

Abbreviation

Supply

SUPPLY

User

USER

Suspension

SUSP

Valve

VLV

Swing/Implement

SWG/IMP

Variable

VAR

Swing

SWG

Vital Info Dsply System

VIDS

Switch

SW

Vital Info Mgmt System

VIMS

System

SYS

Voltage

VOLTAGE

TPMS

TPMS

Wastegate

WASTEGATE

Tank

TANK

Weigh

WT

Temperature

TEMP

Weight

WT

This

THIS

Without

W/O

The

THE

Yes

YES

Then

THEN

Throttle

THROTTL

Tilt

TLT

Time

TIME

Timing

TIMING

Tire

TIRE

Ton

TON

To

TO

Too

TOO

Top

TOP

Top - Front

TOP F

Top - Left

TOP LT

Top - Rear

TOP R

Top - Right

TOP RT

Torque Converter

TC

Torque

TORQ

Trailer

TRL

Trailer Brake Cooler

TRLBRKC

Transmission

TRN

Travel

TRVL

Truck Payload Meas Sys

TPMS

Turbo

TRBO

Uncalibrated

UNCALIBRATED

Unfiltered

UF

Unknown

UNKNOWN

Update

UPD

Upshift

UPSHIFT

i01324776

Keypad
SMCS Code: 7450
Table 21

Contact Description of the Keypad Connector


No.

(continued)

Function

Type

+9 DCV

Input

Ground

Ground

Keypad Data

Output

Unused

86
Systems Operation Section

g00701204

Illustration 165
Keypad
(1) Gauge key
(2) Key pressed indicator

(3) Backward arrow key


(4) Forward arrow key

The keypad allows the operator or the service


technician to communicate with the VIMS main
module. The user can select the information that
will be shown on the message center display.
The operator or the service technician can initiate
service procedures. The keypad also allows the
operator to enter an identification number and the
keypad also allows the operator to acknowledge
events.

(5) F1 key
(6) Harness connector

OK Key
The OK key is used to complete keypad entries
and the OK key is used to acknowledge events.
Examples of the operations of the OK key are
listed below:

Responses to system prompts


Entering an operator identification number

Pressing any key on the keypad causes key


pressed Indicator (2) to FLASH once. This tells the
operator or the service technician that the keystroke
was accepted.

Stopping the requested gauge parameter


Return the message center to the background
display.

When a series of related keystrokes (operator ID


or service program code) must be entered, each
keystroke must be completed in less than five
seconds. Periods that last longer than five seconds
will cancel any previous keystroke (s). The message
center will then return to the previous display mode.

Numeric Keys (0 - 9)
These keys are used to enter numeric information.
Some example of numeric information is listed here:
operator identification number, service program
codes, requested operator responses, and selection
of individual gauge parameters.

ID Key
This key is used by the operator to enter a
identification number. This number is stored with
all event information that may follow, until a new
identification number is entered. Printed reports
show this number with each event. The Operator
ID is not required to operate the machine. This
is the same Operator ID that may be entered
via the menu of the loader payload system. Refer
to the Systems Operation, LPS Menu Functions
Summary section of this manual for additional
information.
The following message is displayed on the message
area after the ID key is first pressed.

87
Systems Operation Section

Illustration 166

g00484268

The operator enters an identification number up to


seven digits. Then press the OK key. The numbers
that are entered are shown on the second line of
the message area.

Illustration 168

g00484272

This information is shown for one parameter at a


time. The FORWARD and BACKWARD arrow keys
are used to scroll through the available parameters.
Second method: Enter the number of the parameter
via the keypad. Then press the GAUGEkey.
This method saves time by accessing a specific
parameter directly. Otherwise scrolling through the
entire parameter list would be necessary.

Illustration 167

g00484271

Input Key Functions


OK Accept the desired operator ID.
ID Clear the entry line in order to enter an
additional operator ID.
GAUGE Abort the entry mode.
LEFT ARROW Delete the last character.
Press the OK key within five seconds of entering
the last keystroke of the operator ID. Otherwise,
the operator ID function will be aborted and the
message center will return to the previous display
mode.

Requested data remains on the message center


module until the OK key is pressed. The background
information (time of day and total machine hours)
then reappears. During the loading cycle, payload
weight is shown for off-highway trucks and large
wheel loaders.
Any previously selected gauge function or
default data is overridden when an abnormal
condition exists. The occurrence of an abnormal
condition will cause the event information to be
displayed on the message area. After the abnormal
condition is corrected or the abnormal condition
is acknowledged, the original gauge parameter
information will be displayed on the message area.
Use the Parameter Table for a complete list of VIMS
parameter names and corresponding numbers. Not
all the parameters in the table are used with every
machine. If an invalid parameter number (XXX) is
entered, the message area shows:

Note: If an event occurs during the operator ID


function, the operator ID function is aborted and
replaced with event information.

GAUGE Key
The GAUGE key is used to request parameter
information. The information will be displayed on
the universal gauge and the message area of the
message center module. The key may be used in
two different ways.

Illustration 169

g00484275

An example of the message area display for a


requested parameter with a failure is shown here:

First method: Press the GAUGE key once in


order to display the first available gauge parameter
on the first line of the message area. The second
line of the message area displays the values of the
gauge parameter. The parameters relative values
are displayed on the universal gauge. An example
of the message area is shown here:
Illustration 170

g00484276

88
Systems Operation Section

Pressing the F1 key toggles the message center


display in order to show service information. This
mode replaces the ERR text with a meaningful
description of the problem. An example of the
message center is shown here:

Illustration 173

g00484278

Pressing the F1 key again would show the


information that was previously shown on the
second line.
Illustration 171

g00484277

DATA EVENTS

Note: For a listing of message center text and FMI


codes, refer to the Testing and Adjusting, Failure
Mode Identifier section of this manual.

When a data event is displayed on the message


center, pressing the F1 key will access additional
parameter information.

FORWARD and BACKWARD Arrow


Keys
The arrow keys gives the operator a way to scroll
through message area information.

F1 Key

Illustration 174

The F1 key (5) is used by the operator to request


additional information about maintenance (system)
and data (machine) events. The F1 key also has
special use with LWL payload. Refer to the Systems
Operation, LPS Operating Functions Summary
section of this manual.

g00569889

The parameter value and units will be displayed on


the second line of the message center. An example
of the parameter information is shown here:

DIAGNOSTIC EVENTS
When a diagnostic type of maintenance event is
displayed on the message center, pressing the F1
key will access additional diagnostic information.
The diagnostic information is shown on the second
line of the message area.

Illustration 175

g00569901

Pressing the F1 key again would show the


information that was previously shown on the
second line of the message area.

Illustration 172

g00569871

The additional diagnostic information is listed here:


MID, CID, and FMI. An example of the diagnostic
information is shown here:

Note: Single Pole Single Throw (SPST) switches


are either OPEN or switches are CLOSED, so
these switches do not have CID or FMI diagnostic
information. Diagnostics for switches will be
displayed as the switch status: OK, OPEN,
NEUTRAL, UP, etc. An example of the status display
is shown here:

89
Systems Operation Section

Oil Level Switch

Illustration 176

g00484280

Note: Double Pole Single Throw (DPST) switches


can have diagnostic codes.

F2 Key
The F2 key is not used with applications prior
to 9.X software on any VIMS machines. The F2
key is used with wheel loader payload. Refer to the
Systems Operation, LPS Menu Function Summary
section of this manual.

F3 Key
The F3 key is not used with applications prior
to 9.X software on any VIMS machines. For 9.X or
later class of on board software and LWL payload,
refer to the Systems Operation, LPS Menu Function
Summary section of this manual.

Illustration 177

g00482124

Oil Level Switch (Engine, Hydraulic)


(1) Switch
(2) Schematic symbol

Oil level switch (1) is closed to ground during


normal operation. The switch opens when the oil
level is less than the minimum level. When the
switch opens the VIMS module warns the machine
operator of the low oil level. When the switch is
tested on the bench, the switch is open. The float
is in the DOWN position.

Pump Inlet Valve Switch (LHEX)


i01382844

Switches
SMCS Code: 1435; 7332
Note: The switches that are listed in this section
may NOT be used on all machines.
Switches provide an open, a ground or a +battery
signal to the switch inputs of the VIMS modules. A
switch can be open or a switch can be closed.

When a switch is open, no signal is provided to


the corresponding input of the VIMS modules.
The condition of no signal is also called floating.

When a switch is closed, the ground or +battery

signals are provided to the corresponding inputs


of the VIMS modules.

Illustration 178
Pump Inlet Valve Limit Switch
(1) Switch
(2) Schematic symbol

g00482127

90
Systems Operation Section

Switch (1) is attached to the control handle of the


inlet suction line valve for each pump. The valves
are located at the hydraulic tank. When the inlet
valve of the pump is open the switch is closed. The
closed switch grounds the signal circuit. When the
inlet valve of the pump is closed, the switch opens
the signal circuit. A machine could use multiple
pump inlet valve switches that are wired in series. If
any of the pump inlet valve switches are open, the
VIMS module warns the operator that the inlet valve
of the pump is closed. When the switch is tested on
the bench, the switch is open. The normally closed
contacts are not used in this application.

Steering Flow Switches

Chip Detector Switch (LHEX)


Illustration 180

g00482137

Steering Flow Switches


(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Switch

During normal operation, steering flow switch (2) is


closed to ground. The switch opens when the oil
flow in the steering system is less than the specified
limit. The VIMS module warns the operator that the
oil flow of the steering systems is low when the
switch is open. Switch (2) is used in the primary
steering systems and the supplemental steering
systems. When the switch is tested on the bench,
the switch is open.

Filter Indicator Switches


Plunger Type
Illustration 179

g00482136

Chip Detector Switch


(1) Schematic symbol. (2) Switch.

During normal operation, switch (2) is open. The


switch contacts are magnetic in order to attract
metal particles. The switch closes the signal circuit
to ground, when enough metal chips cover the
switch contacts in order to complete the circuit. The
VIMS module warns the operator that chips have
been detected when the switch is closed. When the
switch is tested on the bench, the switch is open.
No metal objects are covering the contacts of the
switch. The switch is considered closed, when the
resistance is between approximately 0 and 2000
ohms.

Illustration 181
Filter Bypass Switch
(1) Switch
(2) Schematic symbol

g00482139

91
Systems Operation Section

Filter bypass switch (1) has a plunger within the


switch that closes the contacts with an acceptable
pressure drop across the filter. The switch closes
the signal circuit to ground during normal operation.
When the pressure across the filter is greater than
the specified limit the switch plunger moves in
order to allow the switch contacts to open. The
VIMS module will warn the operator that the filter is
restricted when the switch is open. When the switch
is tested on the bench, the switch is open.
Note: The VIMS module takes the fluid temperature
into consideration before warning the operator.
Cold fluid has a higher viscosity which causes a
higher differential pressure across the filter than
fluid at normal operating temperature. When the
fluid temperature is below a specified limit, the filter
bypass event is ignored by the VIMS module. The
temperature inhibit is not used with the fuel filter.

Differential Pressure Type

Coolant Flow Switch

Illustration 183

g00482162

Coolant Flow Switch


(1) Switch
(2) Schematic symbol

During normal operation, coolant flow switch (1)


is closed to ground as coolant flows against the
paddle. The switch opens when coolant flow is less
than the specified limit. The VIMS module warns
the operator of the low coolant flow in the engine
cooling system when the switch is open. When the
switch is tested on the bench, the switch is open.

Steering Pressure Switch

Illustration 182

g00482160

Differential Pressure Switch


(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Switch
Typical schematic symbol
Filter inlet port
Filter outlet port

Differential pressure switch (1) is activated by a


pressure difference between the filter inlet port (3)
and filter outlet port (4). The switch contacts are
held closed by a spring inside the switch during
normal operation. When the pressure at filter inlet
port (3) exceeds the pressure at filter outlet port
(4) by a specified amount, the force of the spring
is overcome and the switch contacts are opened.
The VIMS module will warn the operator that the
filter is restricted when the switch is open. When the
switch is tested on the bench, the switch is closed
because there is no pressure difference between
ports (3) and (4).

Illustration 184

g00482164

Steering Pressure Switch


(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Switch

During normal operation, steering pressure switch


(1) is closed to ground. When the pressure of the
steering system is less than the specified limit, the
switch is open. When the pressure of the steering
system is greater than the specified limit, the switch
is closed. When the switch is being tested on the
bench, contact B and contact C of the switch are
closed. When the switch is tested on the bench,
the switch contacts A and Bare open. The normally
closed contacts (B and C) are not used in this
application.

92
Systems Operation Section

Automatic Lubrication Grease


Level Switch (LWL)

Pulse width modulated (PWM) The sensor


produces a digital signal with a duty cycle that
varies as the condition changes. The frequency of
this signal is relatively constant and the frequency
contains no information.

Frequency Sensors
Frequency sensors produce a sine wave signal or
square wave signal that varies in frequency (Hz) as
the condition changes.

Suspension Cylinder Pressure Sensor

Illustration 186
Illustration 185

g00527779

g00482617

Suspension Cylinder Pressure Sensor


(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Sensor

Automatic Lubrication Grease Level Switch


(1) Switch
(2) Schematic Symbol

The level of the auto lube lubricant is monitored by


the VIMS on the 994D. When the level of lubricant
in the tank becomes low, level switch (1) will open.
This causes the VIMS to display a warning on the
message center.
i01385531

Sensors
SMCS Code: 1408-NS
Note: The sensors that are listed in this section may
NOT be used on all machines.
Sensors provide the VIMS modules with input
information about changing conditions. The sensors
provide information such as speed and temperature.
The sensor signal changes in a proportional manner
in order to reflect the changing condition. The types
of sensor signals that are recognized by the VIMS
modules are listed here:
Frequency The sensor produces an AC signal that
varies in frequency (Hz) as the condition changes.

Suspension cylinder pressure sensor (2) reacts


to the pressure in a suspension cylinder. The
sensor receives operating power from the machine
electrical system. The sensor sends a square wave
signal that increases in frequency as the suspension
cylinder pressure increase to the VIMS interface
module. The signal voltage is relatively constant
and the voltage contains no information. In order
to determine the suspension cylinder pressure,
the VIMS module measures the frequency of the
signal. Calibration of the VIMS truck payload system
is required after replacement of the suspension
cylinder pressure sensor.

93
Systems Operation Section

Resistive Sensors

Speed Sensor

Fuel Level Sensor - Resistive Type

Illustration 187

g00482515

Speed Sensor
Illustration 189

The speed sensor sends a signal that is proportional


to the engine speed of the 994 to the VIMS module.
Because this is a powered sensor, the output
voltage is relatively constant and the output voltage
does not contain information.

g00482519

Fuel Level Sender


(1) Sender
(2) Schematic symbol
(3) Pictograph symbol

Lift and Tilt Cylinder Oil Pressure Sensor

Illustration 190

g00482523

Buffer (Fuel Level)


Illustration 188

g00482517

Lift and Tilt Cylinder Oil Pressure Sensor


(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Sensor

Lift and tilt cylinders oil pressure sensor (2) reacts to


the pressure that is in the lift cylinder or tilt cylinder.
One Lift and tilt cylinders oil pressure sensor is used
in each oil circuit. The sensor receives operating
power from the machine electrical system. The
sensor sends a square wave signal to the VIMS. The
square wave signal increases in frequency as the
pressure in the suspension cylinders increases. The
signal voltage is relatively constant and the voltage
does not contain information. The VIMS measures
the frequency in order to determine the pressure
in the lift cylinders or tilt cylinders. Calibration of
the VIMS loader payload system is required after
replacement of the lift cylinder oil pressure sensor
and tilt cylinder oil pressure sensor.

(4) Schematic symbol


(5) Buffer

Fuel level sender (1) and buffer (5) provide a way of


sensing the level of the fuel. A resistive signal which
corresponds to the depth of the fuel within the fuel
tank is sent from sender (1) to buffer (5). Buffer
(5) receives operating power from the machine
electrical system. The buffer converts the resistive
sender signal into a PWM signal which is sent to
the VIMS. The VIMS measures the duty cycle of the
signal from the buffer in order to determine the level
of fuel on large wheel loaders (LWL).

94
Systems Operation Section

Pulse Width Modulated Sensors


(PWM)

Temperature Sensor - Fluids And


Ambient Air

Illustration 193

g00482655

Fluid Temperature Sensor


(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Sensor

Temperature sensor (2) reacts to the temperature


of fluids such as hydraulic oil, power train oil, or
engine coolant. The sensor receives operating
power from the VIMS interface module. The sensor
sends a signal that changes as the fluid temperature
changes to the main module. The VIMS measures
the duty cycle of the sensor signal in order to
determine the fluid temperature.
Illustration 191

g00482644

Temperature Sensor - Engine Exhaust


Gas

Pulse Width Modulated Signal

Illustration 194
Engine Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Sensor

Illustration 192

g00482601

Typical Schematic of a PWM Sensor

Pulse width modulated sensors (PWM) produce a


digital signal with a duty cycle that varies as the
condition changes. The frequency remains constant.

g00482659

95
Systems Operation Section

Temperature sensor (2) reacts to the temperature


of engine exhaust gas. The sensor receives
operating power from the VIMS interface module.
The sensor sends a PWM signal which changes as
the temperature of the engine exhaust gas changes
to the main module. The control measures the duty
cycle of the sensor signal in order to determine the
temperature.

Pressure Sensor

The coolant loss sensor is an electronic switch that


is activated by coolant. During normal operation,
coolant loss sensor (1) is closed to ground. The
switch opens when the coolant level is too low.
The VIMS module warns the operator of a very
low coolant condition in the cooling system when
the switch opens. The sensor has a connector
with three contacts. Contact A connects to the
+8 DCV sensor power from the interface module.
Contact B connects to ground and contact C
(switch output) connects to the input of the interface
module. When the sensor is tested on the bench,
the switch is open when power and ground are
disconnected. The sensor cannot be tested in this
state.
Note: DO NOT remove plastic sleeve (3) from the
probe. This plastic sleeve is required for proper
switch operation.

Illustration 195

g00482680

Pressure Sensor
(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Sensor

Pressure sensor (2) reacts to system pressure


such as system air pressure. The sensor receives
operating power from the appropriate interface
module. The sensor sends a PWM signal to the
VIMS that changes in proportion to the air pressure.
The VIMS measures the duty cycle of the sensor
signal in order to determine the pressure.

The internal electronic switch that is in this sensor


functions as a mechanical switch. The switch is
either open or the switch is closed to ground.
Contact C is closed to contact B. This sensor
works with ONLY water or water/glycol solutions
(antifreeze). The sensor will not work with oils,
fuels, etc. A pull-up voltage must be present at the
signal lead. The pull-up voltage is used in order
to pull up the open circuit voltage, when a loss
of coolant has caused the switch to open. This
pull-up voltage (5 VDC) is supplied by the interface
module. The pull-up voltage can only be measured
with a multimeter when the switch is open. When 5
volts are present on the signal lead during normal
operation, the switch is open.

Lift Arm Angle Position Sensor

Coolant Loss Sensor

Illustration 197
Illustration 196
Coolant Loss Sensor
(1) Sensor
(2) Schematic symbol
(3) Plastic sleeve

g00482683

Lift Arm Angle Position Sensor


(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Sensor

g00482241

96
Systems Operation Section

The angle position sensor of the lift arm is an input


to an interface module (994). The position sensor
is mounted near the pivot center of the machines
lift arm. This is a Pulse Width Modulated Sensor
(PWM). The sensor receives operating power from
the machine electrical system. The sensor has
an output frequency of 600 Hz. The frequency
will remain constant. This sensor continuously
generates a PWM signal. The duty cycle varies in
proportion to the angle of the lift arm. The interface
module receives the duty cycle of the PWM signal.
The interface module then measures the duty cycle
of the PWM signal in order to determine the angle of
the lift arm. the VIMS module uses this information
in order to determine the location of the lift arms for
use with the loader payload system.
Note: The position angle sensor of the lift arm must
be calibrated after replacement. See the Testing
and Adjusting, LPS Calibration section of this
manual for the calibration procedure and see the
Testing and Adjusting, Position Sensor (Lift Arm) Adjust section for the adjustment procedure. Be
careful not to force rotation of the sensor beyond
the mechanical limits. Forcing the rotation of the
sensor may cause permanent damage.

Fuel Level Sensor - Ultrasonic Type

Fuel level sensor (4) reacts to the level of the fuel in


the fuel tank. Sensor (4) emits an ultrasonic signal
up guide tube (3). The ultrasonic signal is reflected
off a metal disk on the bottom of float (2) and the
signal returns to the sensor. The sensor measures
the travel time of the ultrasonic signal. The travel
time includes the time to the float and the time
back to the sensor. The sensor also measures the
temperature of the fuel in order to compensate
accordingly. The status of contact 3of the sensor
indicates whether the sensor is used in a deep
tank or a shallow tank. Contact 3 should be open
for a deep tank that has a maximum depth of
2300 mm (90 inch). Contact 3 should be grounded
for a shallow tank that has a maximum depth of
1150 mm (45 inch). The sensor receives operating
power from the machine electrical system. The
VIMS interface module receives a PWM signal from
the sensor that changes as the fuel level changes.
The VIMS module measures the duty cycle of the
sensor signal in order to determine the fuel level.
Note: The fuel level sensor cannot be bench tested.
The sensor must have fuel in guide tube (3) in order
to operate properly. The sensor can be tested only
while the sensor is installed on a machine. For
specifications and test procedures, see the Testing
and Adjusting, PWM Sensor Tests section.
i00946127

Data Connectors
SMCS Code: 1408-CY; 7553

Illustration 198

g00482602

Fuel Level Sensor - Ultrasonic Type


(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Schematic symbol
Float
Guide tube
Sensor
Illustration 199
RS-232 Port For Downloading
9D-3374 Connector

g00482691

97
Systems Operation Section

i01385587

Action Alarm
SMCS Code: 7407

Illustration 200

g00482692

Mating Connector For Downloading Cable


8C-6313 Connector
Illustration 203

g00583116

Action Alarm
(1) Schematic symbol
(2) Action alarm

The action alarm always connects to connector


contact 24 of the VIMS main module. The intermittent
SOUNDING of the action alarm (category 3) tells the
operator to shutdown the machine immediately. The
VIMS main module will SOUND the action alarm,
whenever a category 3 warning exists.

Illustration 201

g00482693

8D-9537 Cap

i00946469

Action Lamp
SMCS Code: 7431

Illustration 202

g00304970

Action Lamp Symbol

The action lamp connects to connector contact 20


of the VIMS main module. The action lamp is an
incandescent lamp (most C-series OHT use an
LED) that is located within the operators viewing
area. The FLASHING of the action lamp tells the
operator that a condition exists. The condition will
require changing the operation of the machine. The
main module FLASHES the action lamp whenever a
warning category 2, 2S or 3 problem exists.

A category 2 special warning will sound this alarm


continuously. This indicates an urgent need to
modify machine operation.
The action alarm does not operate when the engine
is stopped. The VIMS main module gets information
from the engine control in order to determine that
the engine is running. The action alarm SOUNDS,
as required. The action alarm SOUNDS when the
engine is running and a category 2 special warning
or a category 3 warning is present.

98
Systems Operation Section

i01385592

i01385600

Payload Lamps

Service Lamp

SMCS Code: 1430-LMP; 7494-LMP

SMCS Code: 7431-LMP

Illustration 204

g00551434

Truck Payload Lamp


(1) Truck Payload Lamp
(2) Schematic

The red payload lamp output connector contact 22


and green payload lamp output connector contact
23 of the VIMS main module are connected to
the truck payload lamps. The payload lamps are
located outside of the cab. The lamps are in an
area that is easily seen by the loader operator that
is loading the truck. The payload lamps can be
turned ON by the VIMS module at various stages of
the truck loading process.

Illustration 205

g00551483

Service Lamp
(1) Service Lamp
(2) Schematic

The service indicator lamp connects to the output


of the service indicator lamp (contact 21) of the
VIMS main module. The service indicator lamp has
a blue lens. The service indicator lamp is located
outside the cab in an area that is easily seen by
someone that is a distance away from the machine.
The service indicator lamp is turned ON in order to
warn the service personnel that the VIMS module
has detected an active event (data or machine). A
flashing service indicator lamp indicates that the
event could be damaging to the machine. If the
event becomes inactive, the service indicator lamp
is turned OFF. However, the event is stored in the
main module memory.
When power is applied to the VIMS module (key
start switch to the ON position), the main module
memory is checked for any inactive events. If
any events are found, the service indicator lamp
is FLASHED three times. If no events are found,
the service indicator lamp is FLASHED once. The
service indicator lamp can be reset via the keypad
or the off-board service tool even if the event is
still active. For more information, see the Systems
Operation, Service Operations section of this
manual.

99
Systems Operation Section

i01385611

Related Components
SMCS Code: 1408
Machine Batteries, Alternator And Electrical
System
The main module monitors the voltage of the
machine electrical system. The control measures
the system voltage. The control then determines
whether the system voltage is within specified limits.
The voltage is measured at contact 1 (+battery) of
the main module.

Warm up solenoid valves are used by the large


hydraulic excavators in order to ensure that the
hydraulic controls work smoothly. Hydraulic oil is
allowed to flow through the main control valve spool
for each implement during periods of hydraulic
inactivity. The solenoid is de-energized during this
time. When hydraulic activity is resumed the VIMS
module energizes the solenoid in order to close
the warm up valve. This stops the warm up oil
flow through the main control valves. The VIMS
module uses the information that is received from
the electronic engine control in order to regulate the
operation of the solenoids.

Diode Assemblies

Other Electrical Components


Some machines have electronic control modules
that are not part of the VIMS, but the electronic
control modules communicate with the VIMS. The
CAT data link connects these electronic controls
together. This allows the sharing of information such
as engine oil pressure, engine speed, harness
codes and diagnostic information. For example,
an engine control sends engine speed information
to the main module over the CAT data link. In this
situation, the engine speed sensor is not part of the
VIMS.

Solenoids

Illustration 207

g00482941

(1) Schematic symbol of the type A diode assembly


(2) Schematic symbol of the type B diode assembly
(3) Diode assembly

Illustration 206

g00482940

(1) Solenoid
(2) Schematic symbol

The solenoid is used in order to allow VIMS to


cause action. This action could be activating a lube
system or stopping the engine.
Warm Up Solenoid Valves

Diode assembly (3) is installed at all solenoids that


are NOT activated by an electronic control module.
The assembly is installed between the machine
harness and the solenoid. These solenoids could
include various hydraulic solenoid valves and the
horn solenoid. Using the diode assemblies reduces
the amount of electrical noise that is created by the
operation of these solenoids. Electrical noise can
cause erratic operation of the VIMS. The type A
diode assembly is used on most solenoids. The type
B diode assembly is used on the air conditioner
clutch solenoid.

100
Systems Operation Section

Service Key Switch

g00482942

Illustration 208
Service Key Switch
(1) Key switch
(2) Schematic symbol

The service key switch is used in order to access


the VIMS without turning the key start switch of the
machine to the ON position.
i01488834

Parameters
SMCS Code: 7601-NQ
Table 22

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

99

THROTTL LCK
ENABL

100

101

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

Throttle Lock
Enable Switch

36

Calculated

This indicates the position of the


throttle lock enable switch. The
switch is either ON or OFF.

ENG SPD

Engine Speed

36/57/58

Frequency

This is the actual rotational speed


of the crankshaft. The sensor is
mounted on the flywheel housing
(994) or on the camshaft (engine
ECM). The sensor generates a signal
that varies in frequency as the teeth
on the gear pass. The signal is sent
to an ECM. The ECM uses the signal
in order to determine the speed of
the engine.

TRBO IN PRES

Turbo Inlet
Pressure

36

Analog

The pressure sensor for the


turbocharger air inlet sends a
signal that varies in voltage to the
engine ECM. The engine ECM then
calculates the pressure according to
the voltage that is received.
(continued)

101
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

102

LT TRBO IN
PRES

Left
Turbocharger
Inlet Pressure

36

Analog

The left turbocharger inlet pressure


sensor sends a signal that varies
in voltage to the engine ECM. The
engine ECM then calculates the
pressure according to the voltage
that is received.

103

RT TRBO IN
PRES

Right
Turbocharger
Inlet Pressure

36

Analog

The right turbocharger inlet pressure


sensor sends a signal that varies
in voltage to the engine ECM. The
engine ECM then calculates the
pressure according to the voltage
that is received.

104

PEAK AIR
FLTR

Peak Air Filter


(Restriction)

36

Calculated

This is used to show the peak or


maximum air filter restriction for a
given period of time. The engine ECM
calculates this value by subtracting
the value of the atmospheric pressure
from the value of the turbocharger
inlet pressure.

104

AIR FLTR

Air Filter
(Restriction)

36

Calculated

This indicates the degree of


restriction of the engine air filter. The
engine ECM uses the atmospheric
air pressure and the turbocharger air
inlet pressure in order to calculate
the amount of restriction across the
engine air filter. The engine power
is derated 2 percent per kPa of
pressure difference above 6.5 kPa,
up to a maximum total engine derate
of 20 percent. The engine power
is derated up to 20 percent, if the
engine ECM senses a malfunction of
either of these pressure sensors.

105

BOOST PRES

Boost Pressure

36

Analog

The turbocharger outlet pressure


sensor sends a signal that varies
in voltage to the engine ECM. The
engine ECM then calculates boost
according to the voltage that is
received by subtracting atmospheric
pressure.

106

LT EXH TEMP

Left Exhaust
Temperature

36/57/58

PWM

This is the temperature within the left


exhaust manifold of the engine. An
ECM receives a signal that changes
in pulse width as the exhaust within
the left exhaust manifold changes
temperature. The ECM uses the
pulse width that is received in order
to determine the temperature.

107

RT-LT EXH
TEMP

Right Minus
Left Exhaust
Temperature

49

Calculated

The VIMS calculates this value by


subtracting the left manifold exhaust
temperature from the right manifold
exhaust temperature.
(continued)

102
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

108

RT EXH TEMP

Right Exhaust
Temperature

36/57/58

PWM

This is the temperature within


the right exhaust manifold of the
engine. An ECM receives a signal
that changes in pulse width as the
exhaust within the right exhaust
manifold changes temperature. The
ECM then uses the pulse width
that is received to determine the
temperature.

109

TRBO OUT
PRES

Turbocharger
Outlet Pressure

36

Analog

The turbocharger outlet pressure


sensor sends a signal that varies
in voltage to the engine ECM. The
engine ECM then calculates the
pressure according to the voltage
that is received.

110

AFTCLR
TEMP

Aftercooler
Temperature
(Coolant)

36/57

PWM

This is the temperature of the coolant


outlet of the engine aftercooler.
The sensor sends a signal that
changes in pulse width to an ECM.
The ECM then uses the pulse width
that is received to determine the
temperature.

111

F AFTRCLR
TEMP

Front
Aftercooler
Temperature
(Coolant)

36/57

PWM

This is the temperature in the front


section of the engine aftercooler. The
sensor sends a signal that changes
in pulse width to an ECM. The ECM
uses the pulse width that is received
to determine the temperature.

112

R AFTRCLR
TEMP

Rear Aftercooler
Temperature
(Coolant)

36/57

PWM
or
Analog

This is the temperature in the rear


section of the engine aftercooler. The
sensor sends a signal that changes
in pulse width to an ECM. The ECM
uses the pulse width that is received
to determine the temperature.

113

START AID SW

Start Aid Switch

36

Switch

This indicates the status of the start


aid switch. The start aid switch is
either ON or OFF.

114

WASTEGATE
POS

Position of
the Wastegate
Valve

36

Analog

This is the position of the


wastegate valve on the outlet
of the turbocharger. The position
sensor for the wastegate has an
output that changes in voltage as
the position of the wastegate valve
changes. The engine ECM calculates
the position of the wastegate from
the voltage that is received.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

103
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

115

COOL FAN
SPD

Speed of the
Cooling Fan

36

Frequency

This is the speed of the shaft of the


engine cooling fan. The sensor that
is mounted on this shaft generates a
signal that varies in frequency. The
signal changes as the speed of the
cooling fan changes. The engine
ECM calculates the speed of the
engine cooling fan from the signal
that is received.

116

ENG COLD
MODE

Cold Mode
Status

36

Calculated

This indicates the cold mode status.


The status is calculated by the engine
ECM. The status is either ON or OFF.

117

ENG DERATE

Engine
Power Derate
Percentage

36

Calculated

This is used to read the present


engine power derate percentage.
Zero indicates that the engine power
is NOT derated.

118

AIR FLTR

Peak Air Filter


Restriction

36

Calculated

This indicates the restriction of


the peak air filter. The amount of
restriction is calculated by the engine
ECM.

119

ETHER INJEC

Ether Injection

36

Calculated

This indicates when ether is being


injected into an engine as a starting
aid.

120

FUEL POS

Fuel Position

36

Calculated

This is calculated by the engine ECM


after considering the desired engine
speed, fuel ratio control (FRC), and
actual engine speed.

121

ENG LOAD

Engine Load

36

Calculated

This is calculated by the engine


ECM. The engine ECM considers
the data that is listed below for this
calculation:
Engine speed
Position of the throttle switch
Throttle position
Boost pressure
Atmospheric pressure
This is shown as a percent of a full
load.

122

FUEL FLTR

Fuel Filter
(Bypass)

36/57/58

Switch

This is the status of the fuel filter.


The status is PLUGGED or OK.
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the plunger of the switch moves. This
allows the switch contacts to open.
This tells the ECM that the filter is
PLUGGED. With normal operation,
the switch is closed to ground.
(continued)

104
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

123

FUEL LVL

Fuel Level

57/58/50

PWM

This is the level of fuel in the fuel tank.


The fuel level is measured by a fuel
level sensor that is mounted in the
bottom of the fuel tank (Off-highway
trucks/Large excavators). This
sensor sends an ECM a pulse that
varies in width as the fuel level
changes. The fuel level is then
calculated according to the pulse
width that is received. The sensor
also takes the temperature of the fuel
into consideration, and changes the
pulse width accordingly. Large wheel
loaders use a resistive sensor and
float that connects to a PWM buffer.

124

THROTTL SW
POS

Throttle Switch
Position

36

Switch

This is the present setting of the


ten position throttle switch. (Large
excavtors only)

125

THROTTL POS

Throttle Position

36

PWM

The is the position of the throttle foot


pedal. The throttle position sensor
has a pulse output that changes in
width as the foot position of the pedal
changes. The engine ECM uses
the pulse width that is received to
determine the position of the throttle.

126

FUEL FLOW

Fuel Flow

36

Calculated

This is calculated by the VIMS


from the Fuel Flow Engl parameter
received from the engine ECM. The
Fuel Flow Engl value (parameter
127, in gal/sec), is converted to
this fuel flow (parameter 126). This
represents the rate at which fuel is
used by the engine. The units for this
parameter are gallons per hour.

127

FUEL FLOW
ENGL

Fuel Flow
(English Units)

36

Calculated

This value is calculated by the engine


ECM. The value is used to show
the rate at which fuel is used by the
engine (English units). This value is
used on older machines. The units
are gallons per second.

128

FUEL PRES

Fuel Pressure
Filtered
(Primary)

57/58

PWM

This is the fuel pressure that is


present after the fuel filter.

129

ENG FUEL
RATE

Engine Fuel
Rate

36

Calculated

This value is calculated by the engine


ECM This is the rate at which fuel is
used by the engine. The units are
liters per hour.

130

ENG OIL LVL

Engine Oil Level

36/57/58

Switch

This is used to tell the engine ECM


when the engine oil level is less than
the minimum level that is desired. ,
The switch is open when the oil level
is low. In normal operation, the switch
is closed to ground.
(continued)

105
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

131

ENG OIL PRES

Engine Oil
Pressure

36/58

Analog

This is the oil pressure inside of the


the engine after the oil filter. The
sensor sends a signal that varies in
voltage to an ECM. The ECM then
calculates the pressure according to
the voltage that is received. Actual
warning pressure depends upon the
engine speed.

132

ENG OIL PRES


AB

Engine Oil
Pressure
(Absolute)

36

Analog

The oil pressure (absolute) inside


the engine. The sensor sends to an
ECM an voltage that varies as the
pressure changes. The ECM then
calculates the pressure according to
the voltage that it receives. Actual
warning pressure depends upon
the engine speed. Atmospheric
pressure is taken into account for this
calculation.

133

CNKCASE
PRES

Crankcase
Pressure

36

Analog

The pressure inside the crankcase.


The sensor sends the engine ECM a
voltage that varies as the pressure
changes. The engine ECM then
calculates the pressure according to
the voltage that it receives.

134

ENG COOL
FLOW

Engine Coolant
Flow

57/58

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS of the


status of coolant flow in the engine
cooling system (water jacket). During
normal operation, the coolant flow
switch is closed to ground. The
switch opens when coolant flow is
less than specified.

135

ENG COOL
TEMP

Engine Coolant
Temperature

36/58

PWM

This is the coolant temperature


in the engine cooling system. An
ECM receives a signal that changes
in voltage or pulse width as the
engine coolant temperature changes.
The ECM then determines the
temperature from the signal that is
received.

136

HYD COOLR
BLKR

Hydraulic
Cooler Blocker

49

Switch

This is the state of the Hydraulic Oil


Cooler Blocker. The status is either
ON or OFF. ON means that the
hydraulic oil is blocked from passing
through the oil cooler assembly while
the machine is warming up.

137

AFTRCLR LVL

Aftercooler
(Coolant) Level

57/58/50

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS of


the status of the coolant level of
the aftercooler. The switch (sensor)
opens when the coolant level is low.
During normal operation the switch
is closed to ground. This switch
(sensor) is an capacitive type switch
that is activated only by water or
anti-freeze.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

106
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

138

ENG COOL
LVL

Engine Coolant
Level

57/58

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS of


the status of the engine coolant
level. The switch (sensor) opens
when the coolant level is low. During
normal operation the switch is closed
to ground. This switch (sensor) is
an capacitive type switch that is
activated only by water or anti-freeze.

140

SYS VOLTAGE

System Voltage

49

Calculated

This is the actual voltage that exists


between the positive battery terminal
of the machine and frame ground
measured at the main module.

141

MAIN PILOT
PRES

Main Pilot
Pressure

49

PWM

This is the main pilot pressure of the


hydraulic system. This pilot pressure
includes the swing, implement and
travel pilot pressures. An ECM
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the pressure changes.

142

IMPL PRES

Implement Pilot
Oil Pressure

58

PWM

This indicates that the pressure of


the pilot oil for the implements. An
ECM receives a signal that varies in
pulse width as the pressure changes.

143

IMPL PRES
SW

Implement
Pressure Switch

58

Switch

This is the implement pressure


switch status. The status of this
switch indicates when the boom,
bucket or stick function are active or
inactive.

144

UNFLTR OIL
PRES

Unfiltered Oil
Pressure

36

Analog

This is the absolute pressure


(inlcudes atmospheric pressure) of
the engine oil before the engine oil
filter. The engine ECM receives a
voltage that changes as the pressure
changes.

145

HI BOOST
PRES

Boost Pressure
Front or Rear
High

49

Calculated

This parameter monitors the warning


status from the engine ECM to
determine if the front or rear boost
pressure is high.

146

LO BOOST
PRES

Boost Pressure
Front or Rear
Low

49

Calculated

This parameter monitors the warning


status parameter from the engine
ECM to determine if the front boost
pressure is low or the rear boost
pressure is low.

147

CNKCASE
PRES

Crankcase
Air Pressure
(Gauge)

36

PWM

The air pressure that is present


inside of the crankcase.

149

COLD CYL
CUTOUT

Cold Cylinder
Cutout

36

Calculated

This is used to read and program the


Cold Cylinder Cutout Strategy status.

150

AVE CYL
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 1 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 1 engine cylinder.
(continued)

107
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

151

INJ-CYL 1
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 1 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 1 engine cylinder.

152

INJ-CYL 2
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 2 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 2 engine cylinder.

153

INJ-CYL 3
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 3 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 3 engine cylinder.

154

INJ-CYL 4
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 4 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 4 engine cylinder.

155

INJ-CYL 5
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 5 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 5 engine cylinder.

156

INJ-CYL 6
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 6 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 6 engine cylinder.

157

INJ-CYL 7
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 7 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 7 engine cylinder.

158

INJ-CYL 8
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 8 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 8 engine cylinder.

159

INJ-CYL 9
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 9 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the No. 9 engine


cylinder.

160

INJ-CYL 10
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 10 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 10 engine cylinder.

161

INJ-CYL 11
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 11 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 11 engine cylinder.

162

INJ-CYL 12
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 12 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 12 engine cylinder.

163

INJ-CYL 13
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 13 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

TThe temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 13 engine cylinder.

164

INJ-CYL 14
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 14 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 14 engine cylinder.

165

INJ-CYL 15
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 15 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 15 engine cylinder.

166

INJ-CYL 16
TEMP

Engine Cylinder
No. 16 Exhaust
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the exhaust of


the No. 16 engine cylinder.
(continued)

108
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

167

ENG
PRELUBE

Engine PreLube Mode

36

Calculated

This indicates the current mode of


the engine pre-lube system. The
engine prelube modes are as follows:
Pre-Lube is OFF
Pre-Lube is ON
Pre-Lube is DISABLED
Pre-Lube is COMPLETED

168

LT AIR FLTR
RES

Left Air Filter


Restriction

36

Calculated

This is the pressure drop across


the left air filter. The pressure is
calculated by subtracting the left
turbocharger inlet pressure from the
atmospheric pressure.

169

RT AIR FLTR
RES

Right Air Filter


Restriction

36

Calculated

This is the pressure drop across


the right air filter. The pressure is
calculated by subtracting the right
turbocharger inlet pressure from the
atmospheric pressure.

171

ENG OIL PRES


ST

Engine Oil
Pressure Status

36/34/33

Calculated

This is the status of the engine oil


pressure. The status of the engine oil
pressure is OK, LO or HI.

172

CRNK WO INJ
ST

Crank Without
Injection Status

36/34/33

Switch

This reads the crank without injection


status. The crank without injection
status is either ON or OFF.

173

THROTTL SW1
ST

Throttle Switch
No. 1 Status

36

Switch

This indicates the status of the No. 1


throttle switch. The switch contacts
are closed (grounded) when the the
status switch is ON.

174

THROTTL SW2
ST

Throttle Switch
No. 2 Status

36

Switch

This indicates the status of the No. 2


throttle switch. The switch contacts
are closed (grounded) when the the
status switch is ON.

175

THROTTL SW3
ST

Throttle Switch
No. 3 Status

36

Switch

This indicates the status of the No. 3


throttle switch. The switch contacts
are closed (grounded) when the the
status switch is ON.

176

THROTTL SW4
ST

Throttle Switch
No. 4 Status

36

Switch

This indicates the status of the No. 4


throttle switch. The switch contacts
are closed (grounded) when the the
status switch is ON.

177

RT AIR FLTR

Right Air Filter


Restriction

36

Switch

This is the pressure drop across the


right air filter. An open switch means
a plugged filter.

178

LT AIR FLTR

Left Air Filter


Restriction

36

Switch

This is the pressure drop across the


left air filter. An open switch means a
plugged filter.
(continued)

109
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

179

AIR FLTR
STATUS

Air Filter
Restriction
Status

36

Switch

This is the status of the air filter. The


air filter is either PLUGGED or OK.
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the plunger of the switch moves
and allows the switch contacts to
open telling the ECM that the filter is
PLUGGED. With normal operation
the switch is closed to ground.

180

ENG STATUS

Overall Truck
Engine Status.

36

Calculated

This indicates the status of the


engine. This parameter provides the
status (enabled or disabled) of the
features that are listed below:
Altitude Derate
Cold Mode
Cell Throttle
Elevated Idle
Engine Derate
Engine Speed
Cold Cylinder Cutout
Low FUel Pressure
Emergency Stop Shutdown
Fuel Injection
High Hydraulic Oil Temperature
High Coolant Temperature
Low Oil Pressure

181

ALTERNATOR
#1

Alternator No.1

50

Frequency

This is the speed as indicated by the


signal from the alternator R terminal.
The R terminal signal is affected
by belt slip and the health of the
alternator.

182

ALTERNATOR
#2

Alternator No.2

87

Frequency

This is the speed as indicated by the


signal from the alternator R terminal.
The R terminal signal is affected
by belt slip and tthe health of the
alternator.

184

THROTTL
BYPASS

Throttle Bypass

36

Switch

This is the throttle override status.


The status is either OFF or ON.

188

TURBO INLET
TEMP

Turbo Inlet
Temperature

36

Analog

The temperature of the turbo inlet air


to the engine.

230

FNL LUBE
PRES

Final Drive Lube


Low Pressure

116

Switch

The status (OK, LOW or HIGH) of


the final drive (differential) pump
pressure, as indicated by a switch or
sensor.

231

BVL DIFF
FLTR

Diferential
(Bevel Gear)
Filter Status

116

Switch

The status of the differential (bevel


gear) filter as indicataed by a switch
or sensor. The status is either
PLUGGED or OK.

232

BVL PMP
PRES

Differential
(Bevel Gear)
Lube Pressure

116

PWM

This is the differential (bevel gear)


lube pressure. The ECM reads
the pulse width of the signal and
determines the pressure from the
signal that is received.
(continued)

110
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

233

FNL LUBE
FLTR

Final Drive Filter


Switch

116

Switch

This is the status of the final drive


(differential) filter switch. The status
is either PLUGGED or OK.

234

DIFF OIL LVL

Differential Oil
Level

116

Switch

This is the position of the differential


(drive axle) oil level switch.

235

DIFF TEMP

Differential Oil
Temperature

116

PWM

This is the temperature of the oil


in the differential (axle). The ECM
reads the pulse width of the signal
and determines the pressure from
the signal that is received.

240

GND LVL
SHUTDN R

Ground Level
Shutdown
Signal Rear

36

Switch

This is the status of the rear ground


level shutdown switch. The status is
either ON or OFF.

250

GND LVL
SHUTDN F

Ground Level
Shutdown
Signal Front

33

Switch

This is the status of the front ground


level shutdown switch. The status is
either ON or OFF.

251

ENG DERATE
F

Engine Derate
Percentage
Front

33

Analog

This indicates the present front


engine power percentage. Zero
indicates the engine is not derated

252

GOV STATUS
F

Slave
Governing
Status Front
Engine

34

Calculated

This indicates the governing status


(ALONE or SLAVE) of the front
engine slave ECM.

253

F AFTRCLR
TEMP

Front
Aftercooler
Temperature
(Coolant)

33

PWM

This is the temperature of the


coolant in the engine front aftercooler
system. ON MACHINES WITH
TWO ENGINE AFTERCOOLER
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSORS THIS REFERS TO THE
FRONT ENGINE AFTERCOOLER
COOLANT TEMPERATURE.

255

BOOST PRES
F

Engine Outlet
(Boost)
Pressure Front

33

Analog

This is the pressure downstream on


the compressor discharge side of the
turbocharger on the front engine.

256

CNKCASE
PRES F

Engine
Crankcase
Pressure Front

33

PWM

This is the pressure inside the


crankcase of the front engine.

258

F ENG LOAD

Engine Load
Front

33

Analog

This is the actual percentage of


engine load.

259

ENG OIL FLTR


F

Engine Oil Filter


Differential
Pressure
(Gauge) Front

33

PWM

This is the pressure drop across the


engine oil filter for the front engine.

260

ENG OIL LVL F

Engine Oil Level


Front

33

Switch

This is the level of the oil in the


crankcase for the front engine.
(continued)

111
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

261

ENG OIL PRES


F

Engine Oil
Pressure Front

33

Analog

This is the oil pressure inside the


front engine. The sensor sends to
an ECM a voltage that varies as the
pressure changes. The ECM then
calculates the pressure according to
the voltage that it receives. Actual
warning pressure depends upon the
engine speed.

262

F ENG
STATUS

Engine Status
Front

33

Calculated

This is the front engine status.


This parameter provides the status
(enabled or disabled) of the features
that are listed below:
Altitude Derate
Cold Mode
Cell Throttle
Elevated Idle
Engine Derate
Engine Speed
Cold Cylinder Cutout
Low FUel Pressure
Emergency Stop Shutdown
Fuel Injection
High Hydraulic Oil Temperature
High Coolant Temperature
Low Oil Pressure

263

F WASTEGATE
POS

Front
Wastegate
Position

33

Analog

This is the position of the wastegate


valve on the front engine turbocharger
(outlet). The wastegate position
sensor has an output that changes
in voltage as the wastegate valve
position changes From this voltage
the front eng ECM calculates the
waste gate position.

264

F FUEL FLTR

Engine Fuel
Filter Status
Front

33

Switch

This is the status of the front engine


fuel filter. The status is PLUGGED
or OK. When the pressure across
the filter is greater than the specified
pressure, the plunger of the switch
moves and allows the switch contacts
to open telling the ECM that the filter
is PLUGGED. With normal operation,
the switch is closed to ground.

265

BOOST PRES
HI F

High Boost
Pressure Front

49

Analog

This is the front turbocharger outlet


pressure. The sensor sends a voltage
that varies as the pressure changes
to the engine ECM. The engine ECM
then calculates boost according
to the voltage that is received by
subtracting atmospheric pressure.

266

OIL PRES F
LO

Low Oil
Pressure Front

49

Calculated

This parameter monitors the engine


status parameter to see if the front
engine oil pressure is low.

267

EXH TEMP LTF

Engine Left
Front Turbo
Exhaust
Temperature

33

PWM

This is the temperature of the exhaust


on the left bank of the front engine.

(continued)

112
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

268

EXH TEMP
RTF

Engine Right
Front Turbo
Exhaust
Temperature

33

PWM

This is the temperature of the exhaust


on the right bank of the front engine.

269

F RT- F LT EXH
TEMP

Front Right
Minus Front
Left Exhaust
Temperature

49,50

Calculated

This is calculated by an ECM, The


ECM subtracts the front engine right
manifold exhaust temperature from
the front engine left manifold exhaust
temperature.

270

ENG FUEL
RATE F

Engine Fuel
Rate Front

33

Calculated

This is the rate at which fuel is being


used by the front engine.

271

ENG SPD F

Engine Speed
Front

33

Frequency

The actual rotational speed of the


crankshaft on the front engine.

273

F TRBO IN
PRES

Engine Turbo
Inlet Pressure
Front

33

Analog

This is the pressure (absolute) of the


air coming into the right turbocharger
for the front engine.

274

F LO BOOST
PRES

Low Boost
Pressure Front

49

Calculated

This parameter monitors the warning


status parameter of the engine ECM
to see if the boost pressure is low.

275

ENG DERATE
R

Rear Engine
Power Derate
percentage

34

Analog

This indicates the percentage of the


present derate of the rear engine.
Zero indicates the engine is not
derated.

276

GOV STAT R

Slave
Governing
Status Rear
Engine

34

Calculated

Indicates the governing status


(ALONE or SLAVE) of the rear
engine slave ECM.

277

R AFTRCLR
TEMP

Rear Aftercooler
Temperature

34

PWM

This is the temperature of the coolant


in the rear engine aftercooler system.

278

BOOST PRES
R

Engine Turbo
Outlet (Boost)
Pressure Rear

34

Analog

This is the pressure on the


compressor discharge side of the
turbocharger of the rear engine.

279

ENG LOAD R

Engine Load
Rear

34

Analog

This is the actual percentage value


of rear engine load.

280

ENG OIL PRES


R

Engine Oil
Pressure Rear

34

Analog

This is the oil pressure in the rear


engine lubrication system.

281

ENG STATUS
R

Engine Status
Rear

34

Calculated

This is the rear engine status. This


determines the priority of engine
status messages displayed on
service tools.

282

WASTEGATE
POS R

Wastegate
Position Rear

34

Analog

This is the position of the wastegate


valve on the rear engine turbocharger
(outlet). The wastegate position
sensor has an output that changes
in voltage as the wastegate valve
position changes. From this voltage,
the engine ECM calculates the
position of he wastegate valve.
(continued)

113
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

283

FUEL FLTR R

Engine Fuel
Filter Status
Rear

34

Switch

This is the status of the rear engine


fuel filter. The status is either
PLUGGED or OK.

300

GEAR BOX
TEMP

Gear Box
Temperature

36/58

PWM

This is the oil temperature in the


machine (large excavators) gearbox.
An ECM receives a signal that
changes in pulse width as the
gear box oil temperature changes.
The ECM then determines the
temperature from the pulse width that
is received.

301

GEAR BOX
PRES

Gear Box
Pressure

57/58

PWM

This is the oil pressure measured


in the gear box. The sensor sends
the VIMS a pulse that varies in width
as the oil pressure changes. The
VIMS then calculates the pressure
according to the pulse width that is
received.

302

GEAR BOX
CHIP

Gear Box Chip


(Detector)

58

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if chips


have been detected in the gearbox
oil. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing the
switch to close, and thus making a
short circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

303

PT OIL FLTR

Power Train Oil


Filter

57/58

Switch

This is the status of the Power


Train Oil Filter. The status is either
PLUGGED or OK. When the
pressure across the filter is greater
than the specified pressure, the
switch plunger moves and allows the
switch contacts to open telling the
VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.
With normal operation, meaning
acceptable pressure drop, the
switch contacts are closed and the
circuit is grounded. Cold oils often
cause a known filter restriction, so
the VIMS ignores warnings (open
switch) when oil temperature is below
approximately 125 degrees F.

305

TRN GEAR

Transmission
Gear

81

Switch

This is calculated by the transmission


ECM and indicates the actual gear
that the transmission is in.Indicates
the actual transmission gear of the
machine.

306

GEAR
SELECT

Transmission
Cane Select

81

Calculated

This is the gear that the operator has


selected in the machine cab. A switch
on the gear select lever converts
lever position into digital code for use
by the transmission ECM.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

114
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

310

TC FLTR

Torque
Converter Filter
(Bypass)

58/81

Switch

This is the status of the torque


converter inlet oil filter. The status
is PLUGGED or OK. When the
pressure across the filter is greater
than the specified pressure, the
switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the filter is plugged.
With normal operation, the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit
is grounded. Cold oils often cause
a known filter restriction, so the
VIMS ignores warnings (open switch)
when oil temperature is below
approximately 125 degrees F.

311

TC OUT SPD

Torque
Converter
Output Speed

27/57/81

Frequency

This is the speed of the torque


converter output shaft. The sensor
sends a signal to an ECM that is
proportional in frequency depending
on the torque converter output shaft
speed. The ECM then calculates the
speed based upon the frequency that
is received.

312

TC SCREEN

Torque
Converter
Screen

57/58/ 81

Switch

This is the status of the torque


converter outlet screen (filter). The
status is PLUGGED or OK. As the
torque converter screen becomes
PLUGGED, the pressure across the
screen causes the torque converter
screen to be bypassed. When this
bypass occurs, this switch opens
telling the VIMS that the torque
converter screen needs to be
replaced or cleaned.

313

TC OUT TEMP

Torque
Converter
Outlet
Temperature

57/81

PWM

This is the oil temperature on the


outlet side of the torque converter.
The VIMS receives a signal that
changes in pulse width as the torque
converter outlet oil temperature
changes. The VIMS then determines
the temperature from the pulse width
that is received.

314

TC TEMP

Torque
Converter
Temperature

57

PWM

This is the oil temperature on the


outlet of the torque converter. The
VIMS receives a signal that varies in
pulse width as the torque converter
oil temperature changes. The VIMS
then determines the temperature
from the pulse width that is received.
(continued)

115
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

315

TC OUT PRES

Torque
Converter
Outlet Pressure

58

PWM

This is the oil pressure on the outlet


side of the torque converter. The
VIMS receives a signal that changes
in pulse width as the pressure
changes. The VIMS then calculates
the pressure according to the pulse
width that is received.

316

TC PDL POS

Torque
Converter Pedal
Position

81

Calculated

This is the position of the torque


converter foot pedal (large wheel
loaders). The torque converter
position sensor has an pulse
output that changes in width as the
torque converter foot pedal position
changes. The ECM then uses this
signal to determine the torque
converter position. As the torque
converter pedal is depressed, torque
converter power to the wheels is
decreased. After an approximate half
way point, the brakes begin to be
applied.

320

TC CTRL

Torque
Converter
Control

58

CDL

This indicates if the torque converter


has detected a failure. Refer to
the torque converter ECM service
manual for further information (994).

322

QUICKSHIFT
SW

Quickshift
Switch Position

81

Calculated

This is the position of the quickshift


switch. The switch is either ON or
OFF.

323

LUC ENABLE

Lockup Clutch
Enable Switch
Position

81

Switch

This is the position of the lockup


clutch enable switch. The switch is
either ON or OFF.

324

PMP DRIVE
TEMP

Pump Drive Oil


Temperature

81

PWM

This is the actual temperature of


the implement pump oil. The VIMS
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the pump oil temperature
changes. The VIMS then determines
the temperature from the pulse width
that is received.

325

DIFF TEMP

Differential
Temperature
(Oil)

58

PWM

This is the oil temperature inside


of the differential axle. The VIMS
receives a signal that varies in
pulse width as the differential oil
temperature changes. The VIMS
then determines the temperature
from the pulse width that is received.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

116
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

326

DIFF CHIP

Differential Chip
(Detector)

59

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if


chips have been detected in the
differential. As metal chips collect on
the magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

327

DIFF FLTR SW

Differential Filter
Switch (Bypass)

30/58/116

Switch

This is the status of the differential


axle oil filter. The status is either
PLUGGED or OK. When the
pressure across the filter is greater
than the specified pressure, the
switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the differential filter is
PLUGGED. With normal operation,
meaning acceptable pressure drop,
the switch contacts are closed to
ground.

328

DIFF LUBE
PRES

Differential Lube
Pressure

30/58/116

PWM

This is the lubrication pressure


within the differential axle housing.
The sensor sends an ECM a pulse
that varies in width as pressure
changes. The ECM then calculates
the pressure according to the pulse
width that is received.

329

TRN P1 PRES

Transmission
Pressure P1

81

PWM

This is the transmission P1 (control


system) pressure.

330

TRN P2 PRES

Transmission
Pressure P2

81

PWM

This is the transmission P2 (clutch-fill)


pressure.

331

IMPLR CLTCH
PRES

Impeller Clutch
Pressure

81

PWM

This is the impeller clutch pressure.


The sensor sends an ECM a pulse
that varies in width as the pressure
changes. The ECM then calculates
the pressure according to the pulse
width that is received.

332

LUC SOL CMD

Lockup Clutch
Current (Amp)
Percentage

81

Calculated

This is the solenoid command (or


current) as a percentage of maximum
that is being delivered to the lockup
clutch solenoid.

333

RIMPULL
STATUS

Reduced
Rimpull Status

81

Switch

This is the status of the reduced


rimpull feature. The status is either
ACTIVE or INACTIVE.

337

TRN IN SPD

Transmission
Input Speed

81

Frequency

This is the actual rotational speed


of the output shaft of the torque
converter which is the input to the
transmission.
(continued)

117
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

338

TRN INTRMED
SPD

Transmission
Intermediate
Speed

81

Frequency

This is the actual rotational speed


of the intermediate shaft of the
transmission as seen by speed
sensor No.1.

339

TRN LATCH
PRES

Transmission
Latching
Pressure

81

Frequency

This is th etransmission latching


pressure. The transmission ECM
receives a signal to determine if the
transmission is latched or unlatced.

340

TRN LCKOUT
ST

Transmission
Lockout Status

81

Calculated

This is the status of the transmission


lock. The transmission lock inhibits
the transmission from going into
gear while the service technician is
working on the machine.

341

TRN OIL LVL

Transmission
Oil Level

81

PWM

This is the status of the transmission


oil level.

342

TRN OIL PRES

Transmission
Oil Pressure

81

PWM

This is the transmission lube oil


pressure.

343

TRN LCKOUT
SW

Transmission
Lockout Switch

81

Calculated

This is the position of the transmission


control lever in the cab:
REVERSE
FORWARD
NEUTRAL
NOT-IN-REVERSE

346

TRN COLD
MODE

Transmission
Cold Mode

81

Calculated

This indicates the cold mode status


as calculated by the transmission
ECM. The status is either active or
inactive.

347

TRN OUT SPD


2

Transmission
Output Speed 2

81

Frequency

This is the speed of the transmission


output shaft. This signal comes
through the transmission speed
distributor and is sent to the
transmission ECM. The transmission
output speed is directly proportional
to ground speed.

349

TRN GEAR

Transmission
Gear

27/81

Switch

This is calculated by EPTC (electronic


programmable transmission ECM) or
transmission ECM and indicates the
actual gear that the transmission is
in.

350

TRN LUBE
TEMP

Transmission
Lube
Temperature

58/81

PWM

This is the temperature of the


transmission lubrication oil. The
VIMS receives a signal that changes
in pulse width as the temperature
of the transmission lubrication oil
changes. The VIMS uses the pulse
width that it receives to determine
the oil temperature.

351

GEAR
SELECT

Gear Select (By


Operator)

27/81

Switch

This is the gear that the operator has


selected in the machine cab. A switch
on the gear select lever converts
lever position into digital code for use
by the transmission ECM.
(continued)

118
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

352

ACT GEAR

Gear Code
Actual Gear
(Transmission)

31

Calculated

This is the actual gear that the


transmission is in at the present
time. This is being phased out and
replaced with parameter 349 in 9.X
or later class of onboard software.

353

GEAR CODE

Transmission
Gear

27/81

Switch

This is calculated by EPTC (electronic


programmable transmission ECM) or
transmission ECM and indicates the
actual gear that the transmission is
in. Being phased out and replaced
with parameter 349 in 9.X or later of
onboard software.

354

PREVIOUS
GEAR

Previous Gear

27

Calculated

No longer used.

355

TRN OUT SPD

Transmission
Out Speed

81

Frequency

This is the speed of the transmission


output shaft. This signal goes through
the transmission speed distributor
(OHT) and is sent to the transmission
ECM. The transmission output speed
is directly proportional to ground
speed.

355

TRN OUT
SPD1

Transmission
Output Speed 1

81

Frequency

This is the speed of the transmission


output shaft. This signal goes through
the transmission speed distributor
(OHT) and is sent to the transmission
ECM. The transmission output speed
is directly proportional to ground
speed.

356

TRN CHRG
FLTR

Transmission
Charge Filter
(Bypass)

57/58/81

Switch

This is the status of the transmission


charge filter. the status is either
PLUGGED or OK. The transmission
charge line supplies oil to the
hydraulic control valves of the
transmission. When the pressure
across the filter is greater than
the specified pressure, the switch
plunger moves and allows the switch
contacts to open, telling the VIMS
that the filter is PLUGGED.

357

TRN LUBE
FLTR

Transmission
Lube Filter
(Bypass)

58

Switch

This is the status of the transmission


lubrication filter. The status is
either PLUGGED or OK. When the
pressure across the filter is greater
than the specified pressure, the
switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the filter is plugged.
With normal operation, meaning
acceptable pressure drop, the switch
contacts are closed to ground. The
transmission lube circuit provides
lubrication to the clutch disks,
bearings, etc.
(continued)

119
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

358

TRN SLIP

Transmission
Slip (OHT)

27

Calculated

The degree to which the transmission


is slipping at the completion of
a shift. This is calculated by
the transmission ECM. In this
calculation, the transmission input
and output speeds are compared.
This time is the summation of time
for the transmission control solenoids
(up/dowm), actuator the up/down
solenoid control, clutch fill, and
actual slippage of the transmission
plates/disk.

359

LCKUP SLIP

Lockup Slip

27

Calculated

This is the degree to which the torque


converter lockup clutch is slipping
when entering the lockup state. This
is calculated by the transmission
ECM. In this calculation, the torque
converter input speeds and the
output speeds are compared. Total
sliptime is made up of the individual
actuation times much like parameter
358.

360

GEAR CHNG
CODE

Gear Change
Code

31

Calculated

No longer used in 9.X-up except in


trends. Reads the gear change code
of the slip packet. Calibrated by the
transmission control.

361

GEAR MVMT
TIME

Gear Movement
Time

31

Calculated

This is no longer used in 9.X-up


except in trends. This reads the gear
movement time of the slip packet.
Calibrated is done throught the
transmission ECMl.

362

TRN LUBE
TEMP

Transmission
Lube
Temperature

58

PWM

This is the temperature of the


transmission lubrication oil. The
VIMS receives a signal that changes
in pulse width as the transmission
lubrication oil temperature changes.
The VIMS then uses the pulse width
that is received to determine the
temperature of the transmission
lubrication oil.

364

TRN PMP
PRES

Transmission
(Oil) Pump
Pressure

58

PWM

This is the lube oil pressure within the


transmission. The pressure sensor
sends the VIMS a pulse that varies in
width as the pressure changes. The
VIMS then calculates the pressure
according to the pulse width that is
received.
(continued)

120
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

365

TRN FLTR

Transmission
Filter (Bypass)

58

Switch

This is the status of the transmission


oil filter. The status is either
PLUGGED or OK. When the
pressure across the filter is greater
than the specified pressure, the
switch plunger moves allowing the
switch contacts to open telling the
VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.
With normal operation the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit
is grounded. Cold oils often cause
a known filter restriction, so the
VIMS ignores warnings (open switch)
when oil temperature is below
approximately 125 degrees F.

366

NTRL SW

Neutral Switch

57

Switch

This tells the transmission ECM


whether the transmission shift
linkage is in the neutral position.
When the switch is in the neutral
position, the operator is allowed to
crank the engine.

369

NTLRZR SW

Neutralizer
Pressure Switch
Position

81

Switch

This reads the position of the


neutralizer pressure switch. The
switch is either in the RUN or
NEUTRAL position.

370

RIMPULL %

Controlled
Rimpull
Percentage

81

Calculated

This is used to read percent of


maximum rimpull that is controlled
by the transmission ECM. This is
based on the reduced rimpull setting
and the torque converter pedal
modulation. This is not the actual or
available rimpull, which is affected by
the operation of the equipment.

371

IMPLR CLCH
CUR

Impeller Clutch
Current (Amp)
Percentage

81

Calculated

This is the current as a percentage


of maximum that is delivered to the
impeller clutch solenoid from the
transmission ECM.

372

RIMPULL
SELECT2

Reduced
Rimpull
Selection
Switch Position

81

Switch

ThIs is the position of the reduced


rimpull selection switch.
LOW
MEDIUM LOW
MEDIUM HIGH
HIGH

373

RIMPULL
STATUS 2

Reduced
Rimpull
ON/OFF Switch
Position

81

Switch

This is the position of the reduced


rimpull ON/OFF switch.

374

PARKBK

Parking Brake
Pressure Switch
Status

81

Switch

This is used to read the status of


the parking brake pressure switch.
The parking brake is engaged when
the pressure is LOW (open). The
parking brake is disengaged when
the pressure is HIGH (closed).
(continued)

121
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

376

BRK PRES SW

Braking System
Pressure Switch

116

Switch

This is the present state of the


service brake. ON (switch is closed)
or OFF (switch is open).

377

BRK PUMP
SPD

Braking Cooling
Pump Speed

116

Sensor

This is the speed of the brake cooling


pump. The speed is from 0 to 2000
RPM.

378

BRK COOL
FLTR F

Front Brake
Cooling Filter
Bypass

87

Switch

This is the status of the front brake


cooling filter. The status is either OK
or PLUGGED.

379

PARKBK DR
STATUS

Parking Brake
Dragging Status

116

Calculated

This is the dragging status of the


parking brakes. Dragging brake
means the brake pressure sensor
indicates the the the parking brake is
engaged, however the operator is not
asking to engage the brake and the
brake ECM is not trying to engage
the brake.

380

RETRDR

Retarder

83/116

Switch

This is the status of the retarder


system. This parameter will display
either an ON or OFF state.

381

BRK COOL
FLTR R

Brake Cooling
Filter Bypass
Rear

116

Switch

This is the status of the rear brake


cooling filter. The status is either OK
or PLUGGED.

382

BRK LOCKDN

Remote Park
Brake Set

116

Switch

This is the status of the parking brake


lock. The active (ON) status indicates
the parking brake is engaged. The
inactive (OFF) status indicates the
parking brake is disengaged.

400

LT DRIVE CHIP

Left Drive Chip


(Detector)

59

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if chips


have been detected in the left drive
motor. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K Ohms.

401

RT DRIVE
CHIP

Right Drive Chip


(Detector)

58

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the right drive
motor. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

415

SERV BRK
PEDAL

Service Brake
Pedal Position
Status

36

Switch

This reads the position of the service


brake pedal as released (OFF) or
depressed (ON).

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

122
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

416

PARKBK PRES
LTR

Left Rear
Parking Brake
Oil Pressure

116

PWM

This is the oil pressure for the left rear


parking brake. The sensor sends the
VIMS a pulse that varies in width as
the pressure changes. the VIMS then
calculates the pressure according to
the pulse width that is received.

417

PARKBK PRES
RTR

Right Rear
Parking Brake
Oil Pressure

116

PWM

The oil pressure for the right rear


parking brake. The pressure sensor
sends to VIMS a pulse that varies
in width as the pressure changes.
VIMS then calculates the pressure
according to the pulse width that it
receives.

418

LTR WHEEL
SPD

Left Rear Wheel


Speed

27/116

Frequency

This is used to read the actual


rotational speed of the left rear axle
in RPM.

419

RTR WHEEL
SPD

Right Rear
Wheel Speed

27/116

Frequency

This is used to read the actual


rotational speed of the right rear axle
in RPM.

436

RTR-RTF BRK
TEMP

Right Rear
Minus Right
Front Brake
Temperature

49

Calculated

This is calculated by the VIMS. The


value is determined by subtracting
the temperature of the right front
brake from the temperature of the
right rear brake.

437

LTR-LTF BRK
TEMP

Left Rear Minus


Left Front Brake
Temperature

49

Calculated

This is calculated by the VIMS. The


value is determined by subtracting
the temperature of the the left front
brake from the temperatur of the left
rear brake.

438

STRG OIL
PRES

Steering Pump
Oil Pressure
Sensor

58

PWM

This is the steering oil pressure at


the pump outlet. The VIMS receives
a signal that changes in pulse width
as the steering oil pressure changes.
The VIMS then determines the
pressure from the pulse width that is
received.

440

STRG OIL
PRES

Steering Pump
Pressure

57

Switch

Notifies VIMS of low steering oil


pressure. With low pressure the
switch would be open. In normal
operation, the switch is closed to
ground.

441

LO STRG
PRES

Low Steering
Pressure

50/57/58

Switch

This notifies the VIMS of a conditon


of low oil pressure at the pump outlet
in the steering system. With low
pressure, the switch will be open.
In normal operation, the switch is
closed to ground.

442

HI STRG PRES

High Steering
Pressure

57/50

Switch

This notifies the VIMS that a condition


of low oil pressure in the steering
system. With low pressure, the switch
should be open to ground. In normal
operation, the switch is closed to
ground.
(continued)

123
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

444

STRG OIL
TEMP

Steering Oil
Temperature

50/57

PWM

This is the temperature of the main


steering system oil. The VIMS
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the temperature of the
main steering system oil changes.
The VIMS then determines the oil
temperature from the pulse width that
is received.

445

STRG OIL
FLTR

Steering Oil
Filter

57

Switch

This is the status of the main


steering system oil filter. The status
is either PLUGGED or OK. When the
pressure across the filter is greater
than the specified pressure, the
switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the filter is plugged.
With normal operation, the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit
is grounded. Cold oils often cause
a known filter restriction, so the
VIMS ignores warnings (open switch)
when oil temperature is below
approxinately 125 degrees F.

446

STRG PILOT
PRES

Steering Pilot
Pressure

39

PWM

This is the oil pressure in the steering


pilot oil system. An ECM receives a
signal that varies in pulse width as the
steering pilot pressure changes. The
ECM then determines the pressure
from the pulse width that is received.

447

STRG OIL
LEVEL

Steering Oil
Level

58/50

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS of the


status of oil level in the main steering
system. The status is either LO or
OK. The switch opens when steering
oil level is less than the specified.
During normal operation, the switch
is closed to ground.

448

STRG/TRN
LCK

Steering/
Transmission
Lock

51

Switch

This is the status of the steering


and transmission lockout systems.
A switch with two outputs (normally
closed and normally open) is used
as inputs to notify the transmission
ECM of the lockout condition. At any
given time one input must always be
connected to ground and the other
must be open. If this case is not so,
the transmission ECM knows that
there is a failure in the system. When
steering/transmission lockout is
active, the steering and transmission
systems are not allowed to function.
(continued)

124
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

449

PRI STRG
PRES

Primary
Steering
Pressure

57

Switch

This is the status of the oil pressure


on the primary side of the steering
system. The status is either LO or
OK. This pressure switch is normally
connected to ground. When the
pressure becomes lower than a
specified level, the switch opens
notifying the VIMS that there is low
oil pressure.

450

F BRK OIL
TEMP

Front Brake Oil


Temperature

58

PWM

This is the temperature of the cooling


oil from both front brakes. The VIMS
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the front brake system
cooling oil changes temperature.
The VIMS then determines the
temperature from the pulse width that
is received.

451

R BRK OIL
TEMP

Rear Brake Oil


Temperature

58

PWM

This is the temperature of the cooling


oil from both rear brakes. The VIMS
receives a signal that changes in
pulse width as the rear brake system
cooling oil changes temperature.
The VIMS then determines the
temperature from the pulse width that
is received.

452

BRK/AIR
PRES

Brake Air
Pressure

39

PWM

This is the air pressure in the braking


system. The pressure sensor sends
the VIMS a signal that varies in width
as the brake air system pressure
changes. VIMS then calculates the
pressure according to the pulse width
that is received.

453

PARKBK

Parking Brake

57/59/81/
116

Switch

This is the status of the parking


brake. The status is either ON or
OFF. With the parking brake off, the
switch is open, but when the parking
brake is on, a ground signal is sent
to an ECM. A warning message will
be generated if the parking brake is
engaged while the machine is not in
neutral.

454

BRK FLTR

Brake Filter

57

Switch

This is the status of the filter in the


oil cooling line for the brakes. The
status is either OK or PLUGGED.
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.

455

BRK TEMP

Brake
Temperature

58

PWM

This is the temperature of the brake


oil. The VIMS receives a signal that
varies in pulse width as the brake
oil temperature changes. The VIMS
then determines the temperature
from the pulse width that is received.
(continued)

125
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

456

BRK STROKE

Brake Stroke

58

Switch

This is a switch(s) that tells VIMS if


the brake master oil line pressure
is too low or if one of the master
brake cylinders (there can be more
than one brake stroke switch, in
which case they would be wired in a
series circuit) has overstroked. In a
failed state, the normal switch path
to ground will be opened, notifying
VIMS that there is a problem with
at least one of the brake master
cylinders.

457

PRI BRK PRES

Primary Brake
Pressure

57/58

Switch

This is the status of the primary brake


pressure switch. In normal operation
the switch is closed to ground, but
when the brake is applied the switch
is open.

458

SEC BRK
PRES

Secondary
Brake Pressure

57/58

Switch

This is the status of the secondary


brake lever pressure switch. The
status of the secondary brake
pressure switch is closed when the
secondary brake lever has been
applied (parking brake).

460

LTF BRK
TEMP

Left Front Brake


Temperature

58/116

PWM

This is the temperature of the cooling


oil from the left front brake. The VIMS
receives a signal that changes in
pulse width as the temperature of the
oil coming from the left front brake
changes. The VIMS then determines
the temperature from the pulse width
that is received.

461

LTR BRK
TEMP

Left Rear Brake


Temperature

58/116

PWM

This is the temperature of the cooling


oil from the left rear brake. The VIMS
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the temperature of the
oil coming from the left rear brake
changes. The VIMS then determines
the temperature from the pulse width
that is received.

462

RTF BRK
TEMP

Right Front
Brake
Temperature

58/116

PWM

This is oil temperature from the right


front brake. The VIMS receives a
signal that varies in pulse width as
the temperature of the oil coming
from the right front brake changes.
The VIMS then determines the
temperature from the pulse width that
is received.

463

RTR BRK
TEMP

Right Rear
Brake
Temperature

58/116

PWM

This is the temperature of the cooling


oil from the right rear brake. The
VIMS receives a signal that varies in
pulse width as the temperature of the
oil coming from the right rear brake
changes. The VIMS then determines
the temperature from the pulse width
that is received.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

126
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

464

RTF-LTF BRK
TEMP

Right Front
Minus Left
Front Brake
Temperature

49

Calculated

This is calculated by VIMS. The


value is determined by subtracting
the temperature of the left front brake
from the temperature of the right
front brake.

465

RTR-LTR BRK
TEMP

Right Rear
Minus Left
Rear Brake
Temperature

49

Calculated

This calculated by the VIMS. The


value determined by subtracting the
tempeature of the left rear brake
from the temperature of the right rear
brake.

466

PARKBK PRES
SW

Parking Brake
Filter Switch

57

Switch

ThIs the status of the parking brake


filter. The status is either OK or
PLUGGED. When the pressure
across the filter is greater than
the specified pressure, the switch
plunger moves and allows the switch
contacts to open telling the VIMS that
the filter is PLUGGED. With normal
operation, the switch contacts are
closed and the circuit is grounded.

467

BRK COOL
FLTR F

Front Brake
Cooling Filter
Status

59

Switch

This is the status of the front brake


cooling filter. The status is either OK
or PLUGGED. When the pressure
across the filter is greater than
the specified pressure, the switch
plunger moves and allows the switch
contacts to open telling the VIMS that
the filter is PLUGGED. With normal
operation, the switch contacts are
closed and the circuit is grounded.

468

BRK COOL
FLTR R

Rear Brake
Cooling Filter
Status

59

Switch

This is the status of the rear brake


cooling filter. The status is either OK
or PLUGGED. When the pressure
across the filter is greater than
the specified pressure, the switch
plunger moves and allows the switch
contacts to open telling VIMS that
the filter is PLUGGED. With normal
operation, the switch contacts are
closed and the circuit is grounded.

470

F BRK OIL
PRES

Front Brake Oil


Pressure

58

PWM

This is the oil pressure at the inlet of


the front brakes. The sensor sends
the VIMS a pulse that varies in
width as the pressure changes. The
VIMS then calculates the pressure
according to the pulse width that is
received.

471

R BRK OIL
PRES

Rear Brake Oil


Pressure

58

PWM

This sis the oil pressure at the inlet


of the rear brakes. The sensor sends
the VIMS a pulse that varies in
width as the pressure changes. The
VIMS then calculates the pressure
according to the pulse width that is
received.
(continued)

127
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

472

F BRK ACUM
PRES

Front Brake
Accumulator
Pressure

57

Switch

This is the pressure of the front brake


accumulator. This pressure switch is
normally connected to ground. When
the pressure becomes lower than
the desired level, the pressure switch
opens, notifying the VIMS that there
is low pressure in the front brake
accumulator system.

473

R BRK ACUM
PRES

Rear Brake
Accumulator
Pressure

57

Switch

This is the pressure of the rear brake


accumulator. This pressure switch is
normally connected to ground. When
the pressure becomes lower than
the desired level, the pressure switch
opens, notifying the VIMS that there
is low pressure in the rear brake
accumulator system.

474

F AXLE OIL
TEMP

Front Axle Oil


Temperature

57

PWM

This sis the temperature of the oil


within the front axle. The VIMS
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the front axle oil temperature
changes. The VIMS then determines
the temperature from the pulse width
that is received.

475

R AXLE OIL
TEMP

Rear Axle Oil


Temperature

57

PWM

This is the temperature of the oil


within the rear axle. The VIMS
receives a signal that changes in
pulse width as the rear axle oil
temperature changes. The VIMS
then determines the temperature
from the pulse width that is received.

476

PARKBK CAB
SW

Parking Brake
Cab Switch

81

Switch

This is the status of the switch in


the cab that is used to engage or
disengage the parking brake. The
switch is either in the parking brake
engaged position (OPEN) or the
parking brake disengaged position
(CLOSED).

477

BRK ACUM
PRES

Brake
Accumulator
Pressure

57

Switch

This is thepressure of the brake


accumulator. This pressure switch
is normally closed to ground. When
the pressure becomes lower than
the desired level, the switch opens
notifying the VIMS that there is low
pressure in the brake accumulator
system.

478

RT TRL BRK
TEMP

Right Trailer
Brake (Oil)
Temperture

59

PWM

This is the temperature within the


right trailer brake oil. The sensor
sends the VIMS a pulse that varies in
width as the temperature changes.
The VIMS then calculates the
temperature according to the pulse
width that is received.
(continued)

128
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

479

LT TRL BRK
TEMP

Left Trailer
Brake (Oil)
Temperature

59

PWM

This is the temperature of the left


trailer brake oil. The sensor sends the
VIMS a pulse that varies in width as
the temperature changes. The VIMS
then calculates the temperature
according to the pulse width that is
received.

480

TRLBRKC IN
TEMP

Trailer Brake
Cooler (Oil) Inlet
Temperature

59

PWM

This is the temperature of the trailer


brake oil at the inlet side of the trailer
brake oil cooler. The VIMS receives
a signal that changes in pulse width
as the cooler inlet oil temperature
changes. VIMS then determines the
temperature from the pulse width that
iis received.

481

TRLBRKC OUT
TEMP

Trailer Brake
Cooler
(Oil) Outlet
Temperature

59

PWM

This is the temperature of the trailer


brake oil at the outlet side of the
trailer brake oil cooler. The VIMS
receives a signal that changes in
pulse width as the cooler outlet oil
temperature changes. The VIMS
then determines the temperature
from the pulse width that is received.

482

TRL FLTR

Trailer Filter
Plug

59

Switch

The status of the trailer brake oil filter.


The switch will open in the case of a
plugged filter.

483

TRL BRK
STROKE

Trailer Brake
Stroke

59

Switch

This is a switch(s) that tells the


VIMS if the trailer brake master oil
line pressure is to low, or if one of
the trailer brake master cylinders
(There can be more than one brake
stroke switch, in which case they
would be wired in a series circuit)
has overstroked. If one of these
conditions are met the VIMS would
be notified that there is a problem
with at least one of the master trailer
brake cylinders.

484

STRG TEMP
SW

Steering Oil
Temperature
Switch

58

Switch

The steering oil temperature status.


If the temperature gets above a
predetermined level, the switch
will open to indicate steering oil
temperature is too high.

485

ENG OIL FLTR

Engine Oil
Filter Differential
Pressure

36

Switch

This is the status of the pressure


drop across the engine oil filter. The
status is either OK or PLUGGED.
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.
With normal operation, the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit is
grounded.
(continued)

129
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

486

RT STRPMP
PRES

Right Steering
Pump Pressure

58

PWM

This indicates the right steering


pump oil pressure.

487

LT STRPMP
PRES

Left Steering
Pump Pressure

58

PWM

This indicates the left steering pump


oil pressure.

488

STG COOL
FLTR

Steering
Cooling Filter
Status

57

Switch

This is the status of the steering


cooling filter. The status is either OK
or PLUGGED. When the pressure
across the filter is greater than
the specified pressure, the switch
plunger moves and allows the switch
contacts to open telling the VIMS that
the filter is PLUGGED. With normal
operation, the switch contacts are
closed and the circuit is grounded.

490

STRG RTRN
FLTR

Steering Return
to Tank Filter
Status

58

Switch

The status of the steering return


to tank filter (OK or PLUGGED).
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.
With normal operation, the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit is
grounded.

491

LT STRG
CASEDRN

Left Steering
Case Drain
Pump
Temperature

58

PWM

This is the temperature of the oil


within the left steering case drain
pump. The VIMS receives a signal
that varies in pulse width as the oil
temperature of the left steering case
drain pump changes. The VIMS then
determines the temperature from the
pulse width that is received.

492

RT STRG
CDRN

Right Steering
Case Drain
Pump
Temperature

58

PWM

This is the temperature of the right


steering case drain oil.

493

PARKBK FLTR

Parking Brake
Oil Filter Status

116

Switch

This is the status of the parking


brake oil filter. The status is either OK
or PLUGGED. When the pressure
across the filter is greater than
the specified pressure, the switch
plunger moves and allows the switch
contacts to open telling the VIMS that
the filter is PLUGGED. With normal
operation, the switch contacts are
closed and the circuit is grounded.
(continued)

130
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

494

LT STRG
CDRN

Left Steering
Case Drain Oil
Filter Status

58

Switch

This is the status of the oil filter


on the left steering case drain.The
status is either OK or PLUGGED.
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.
With normal operation, the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit is
grounded.

495

RT STRG
CDRN

Right Steering
Case Drain Oil
Filter Status

58

Switch

This is the status of the oil filter on


the right steering case drain. The
status is either OK or PLUGGED.
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
the VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.
With normal operation, the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit is
grounded.

496

PARKBK DRAG

Park Brake Drag

27

Switch

This indicates which of the parking


brakes are dragging. The switch
statuses are listed below:
OK
LT R
RT R
BOTH R

498

F HI PRES
FLTR

Front High
Pressure Filter

58

Switch

The status of the front implement


high pressure hydraulic oil filter.
When the pressure across the filter is
greater than the specified pressure,
the switch plunger moves and allows
the switch contacts to open telling
VIMS that the filter is PLUGGED.
With normal operation, the switch
contacts are closed and the circuit is
grounded.

499

R HI PRES
FLTR

Rear High
Pressure Switch

58

Switch

This is the status of the rear


implement high pressure hydraulic oil
filter. The status is either PLUGGED
or OK. When the pressure across
the filter is greater than the specified
pressure, the switch plunger moves
and allows the switch contacts to
open telling the VIMS that the filter is
PLUGGED. With normal operation,
the switch contacts are closed and
the circuit is grounded.
(continued)

131
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

500

HYD OIL TEMP

Hydraulic Oil
Temperature

36/39/58

PWM

The hydraulic oil temperature. An


ECM receives a signal that changes
in pulse width as the hydraulic oil
temperature changes. The ECM then
determines the temperature from the
pulse width that is received.

501

PMP IN VALVE

Pump Inlet
Valve

57

Switch

These switches are attached to the


inlet suction line for each hydraulic
oil pump. They are located at the
hydraulic oil tank. When the pump
inlet valve is open, meaning that oil
can flow, the switch is closed, and the
circuit is grounded. There could be
multiple switches wired in series on
one particular machine, after which
a switch(s) opens (meaning no oil
flow), the ECM would know there is
no oil flow in one or more circuits.

502

HYD OIL LVL

Hydraulic Oil
Level

57

Switch

This is the status of the hydraulic oil


level. The status is either LO or OK.
With low hydraulic oil level, the switch
will open. In normal operation, the
switch is closed to ground.

503

CASE DRN
FLTR

Case Drain
Filter

57

Switch

This is the status of the case drain


filter. The status is either PLUGGED
or OK. As the case drain filter
becomes PLUGGED, the machine
mechanically bypasses the oil filter.
When this filter is bypassed, the flow
of oil in the bypass route opens a
switch that tells the VIMS that the
filter is plugged. In normal operation
the switch is closed to ground.

504

HI PRES FLTR

High Pressure
Filter

58

Switch

This is a result obtained from up to


eight high pressure filters. These
high pressure filters are wired in a
series circuit to ground. If any one of
the filters becomes PLUGGED, the
corresponding switch (circuit) opens,
indicating that at least one of the high
pressure filters is PLUGGED.

505

HOIST
SCREEN

Hoist Screen

58

Switch

This is the status of the hoist


screen. The status is PLUGGED
or OK. As the hoist screen
becomes PLUGGED, the machine
mechanically bypasses the hoist
screen. When the bypass occurs, the
flow of oil in the bypass route opens
a switch that tells the VIMS that the
hoist screen needs to be replaced
or cleaned. In normal operation the
switch is closed to ground.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

132
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

506

HYD RTN
FLTR

Hydraulic
Return Filter

57

Switch

This is the status of the hydraulic oil


return line filter (PLUGGED or OK).
As the hydraulic oil return line filter
becomes PLUGGED, mechanically
the machine causes the hydraulic
oil return line filter to be bypassed.
When this bypass occurs, the flow of
oil in the bypass route opens a switch
that tells VIMS that the hydraulic oil
return filter needs to be replaced or
cleaned.

507

LT F PMP CHIP

Left Front Pump


Chip

58

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if chips


have been detected in the left front
pump. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

508

LT R PMP
CHIP

Left Rear Pump


Chip

58

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the left rear
pump. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

509

RT F PMP
CHIP

Right Front
Pump Chip

58

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if chips


have been detected in the right front
pump. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.
(continued)

133
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

510

RT R PMP
CHIP

Right Rear
Pump Chip

58

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the right
rear pump. As a large number of
metal chips collect on the magnetic
contacts of the switch, a short circuit
is made from one terminal to the
other causing a closed circuit to
ground. During normal operation,
the switch is in the open position.
The switch is considered closed
when the resistance between the two
switch terminals is between zero and
approximately 2K ohms.

511

HYD SYS
PRES

Hydraulic
System
Pressure

58

Switch

This is the present pressure of the


hydraulic system.

513

DIFF OIL LVL

Differential Oil
Level

58

Switch

This is the status of the differential


oil level. The status is either LO or
OK. With a low oil level the switch will
open. In normal operation the switch
is closed to ground.

515

HYD OIL LVL

Hydraulic Oil
Level

58

Switch

This is the status of the hydraulic oil


level. The status is either LO or OK.
With a low oil level, the switch will
open. In normal operation, the switch
is closed to ground.

516

HYD OIL TEMP

Hydraulic Oil
Temperature

36/57

PWM

This is the temperature of the


hydraulic oil. An ECM receives a
signal that varies in pulse width
as the hydraulic oil temperature
changes. The ECM then determines
the temperature from the pulse width
that is received.

517

HYD OIL FLTR

Hydraulic Oil
Filter

57/58

Switch

This is the status of the hydraulic oil


filter. The status is either PLUGGED
or OK. When the pressure across
the filter is greater than the specified
pressure, the switches plunger
moves and allows the switch contacts
to open telling the VIMS that the filter
is plugged. With normal operation,
the switch contacts are closed and
the circuit is grounded. Cold oils
often cause a known filter restriction,
so the VIMS ignores warnings (open
switch) when the temperature of
the oil is below approximately 125
degrees F.

518

HYD PILOT
PRES

Hydraulic Oil
Pilot Pressure

58

PWM

This is the oil pressure in the


hydraulic pilot oil line. The machine
ECM receives a signal that varies
in pulse width as the hydraulic pilot
oil pressure changes. The machine
ECM then determines the pressure
from the pulse width that is received.
(continued)

134
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

519

ENG FAN
BYPASS

Engine Fan
Bypass

36/49

Calculated

This is used to read and override the


bypass valve position of the engine
cooling fan. Override is accomplished
through a PC that is running the
Electronic Technician software only.

520

ENG FAN SPD

Engine Fan
Speed

36/39

Frequency

This is the speed of the engine


cooling fan shaft. The sensor
mounted on the engine fan shaft
generates an signal that varies in
frequency as the cooling fan shaft
varies in speed.This signal is sent
to an ECM that uses the signal to
determine the speed of the engine
cooling fan.

521

HYD FAN SPD

Hydraulic Fan
Speed

36/39

Frequency

This is the speed of the hydraulic


oil cooling fan shaft. The sensor
mounted on the hydraulic oil cooling
fan shaft generates a signal that
varies in frequency. This signal
is sent to an ECM that uses the
signal to determine the speed of the
hydraulic oil cooling fan.

524

DIFF FAN

Differential Fan

30

Calculated

This is the status of the fan that is


used to cool the differential axle oil.
The status is either ON or OFF. This
value is received from the Caterpillar
Monitoring System over the CAT
Data Link.

525

HYD FAN
BYPASS

Hydraulic Fan
Bypass

36/49

Calculated

This is used to read and override the


bypass valve position of the cooling
fan for the hydraulic oil. Override is
accomplished through a PC that is
running the Electronic Technician
software only.

526

LT HYD CDRN

Left Hydraulic
Case Drain
Temperature

59

PWM

This is the oil temperature from the


case drain of the left hydraulic pump.

527

CTR HYD
CDRN

Center
Hydraulic
Case Drain
Temperature

59

PWM

This is the oil temperature from the


case drain of the center hydraulic
pump.

528

RT HYD CDRN

Right Hydraulic
Case Drain
Temperature

59

PWM

This is the oil temperature from the


case drain of the right hydraulic
pump.

529

HYD LUBE
FLTR

Hydraulic Lube
Pump Filter

59

Switch

This is the status of the hydraulic


lube pump filter. The status is either
OK or PLUGGED.
(continued)

135
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

530

F SWG OIL
LVL

Front Swing Oil


Level

39

Switch

This indicates the status of the


oil level of the front swing motor.
The status is either LO or OK. In a
situation of low oil level the switch is
in the open state, whereas in normal
operation the switch is closed to
ground.

531

LT R SWG OIL
LVL

Left Rear Swing


Oil Level

39

Switch

This indicates the status of the oil


level of the left rear swing motor.
The status is either LO or OK. In the
situation of low oil level the switch
should be in the open state, whereas
in normal operation the switch is
closed to ground.

532

RT R SWG OIL
LVL

Right Rear
Swing Oil Level

39

Switch

This indicates the status of the right


rear swing motor.The status is either
LO or OK. In a situation of low oil
level the switch should be in the open
state, whereas in normal operation
the switch is closed to ground.

533

LT SWG OIL
LVL

Left Swing Oil


Level

57

Switch

This is the oil level in the left swing


drive motor.

534

RT SWG OIL
LVL

Right Swing Oil


Level

57

Switch

This is used to read the oil level in


the right swing drive motor.

535

DUAL PRES
RLF

Dual Pressure
Relief Solenoid

39

Switch

This is used to read the status of the


dual pressure relief function. This
status reflects the status based on
the command from the ECM.

540

SWG OIL LVL

Swing Drive
Motor Oil Level

39

Switch

This indicates the status of the swing


oil level. The status is either LO or
OK. In a situation of low oil level the
switch is in the open state, whereas
in normal operation the switch is
closed to ground.

541

SWG PMP
CHIP

Swing Pump
Chip

58

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if


chips have been detected in the
swing pump. As a large number of
metal chips collect on the magnetic
contacts of the switch, a short circuit
is made from one terminal to the
other causing a closed circuit to
ground. During normal operation,
the switch is in the open position.
The switch is considered closed
when the resistance between the two
switch terminals is between zero and
approximately 2K ohms.
(continued)

136
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

542

LT SWG MTR
CHIP

Left Swing
Motor Chip

57

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the left
swing motor. As a large number of
metal chips collect on the magnetic
contacts of the switch, a short circuit
is made from one terminal to the
other causing a closed circuit to
ground. During normal operation,
the switch is in the open position.
The switch is considered closed
when the resistance between the two
switch terminals is between zero and
approximately 2K ohms.

543

RT SWG MTR
CHIP

Right Swing
Motor Chip

57

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if chips


have been detected in the right
swing motor. As a large number of
metal chips collect on the magnetic
contacts of the switch, a short circuit
is made from one terminal to the
other causing a closed circuit to
ground. During normal operation,
the switch is in the open position.
The switch is considered closed
when the resistance between the two
switch terminals is between zero and
approximately 2K Ohms.

544

IMPL PILOT
FLTR

Implement Pilot
Filter

39

Switch

This is the status of a switch that


is open when the implement pilot
filter becomes PLUGGED. As the
implement pilot filter becomes
PLUGGED, mechanically the
machine causes the oil filter to be
bypassed. Which opens a switch
that tells an ECM that the filter is
PLUGGED. Over the CAT data link,
VIMS is made aware of the condition.

545

LT HYD CDRN
ST

Left Hydraulic
Case Drain Oil
Filter Status

58

Switch

This is the status of the oil filter on


the left hydraulic case drain. The
status is either OK or PLUGGED.

546

CTR HYD CDRN


ST

Center
Hydraulic Case
Drain Oil Filter
Status

58

Switch

This is the status of the oil filter on


the center hydraulic case drain. The
status is either OK or PLUGGED.

547

HYD CDRN ST
RT

Right Hydraulic
Case Drain Oil
Filter Status

58

Switch

This is the status of the oil filter on


the right hydraulic case drain. The
status is either OK or PLUGGED.

550

SYS AIR PRES

System Air
Pressure

50/57/58

PWM

This is a measure of the air pressure


in the main supply line for the
machine. The sensor sends the
VIMS a pulse that varies in width
as the pressure changes. The
VIMS then calculates the pressure
according to the signal that is
received.

Parameter
Number

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

137
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

555

HYD LOOP
FLTR

Hydraulic Circuit
Filter Status

58

Switch

This is used to read the status of the


hydraulic circuit filter. The staus is
either OK or PLUGGED.

560

LT LADDER
POS

Left Ladder
Position

39

Switch

This is the position of the left ladder


(or the only ladder) that is used for
access to the machine. The two
states of the ladder position are up or
down. The switch is closed with the
ladder up.

561

SWG BRK

Swing Brake

39

Solenoid

The status of the swing brake


command (output from ECM).
The status is either ON (solenoid
energized) or OFF (solenoid
de-energized).

562

TRVL BRK

Travel Brake

39

Solenoid

This is the status of the travel


brake command (output from ECM).
The status is either ON (solenoid
energized) or OFF (solenoid
de-energized).

563

AUTO LUBE
(CDL)

Auto Lube CAT


data link

39

Calculated

This reads the status of auto lube


system and is used to turn auto lube
ON or OFF. Auto lube is used to apply
grease to the joints of the machine.

564

HYD PMP
CDRN

Hydraulic Pump
Case Drain
Filter Switch

58

Switch

This is the status of the case drain


hydraulic oil filter. The status is either
PLUGGED or OK. The switch is open
whe the status is plugged.

565

RT LADDER
POS

Right Ladder
Position

39

Switch

This is the position of the right


ladder that is used for access to
the machine. The two states of the
ladder position are up or down. The
switch is closed when the ladder is
in the up position.

570

LFT CYLHD
PRES

Lift Cylinder
Head Pressure

57

Frequency

This is the oil pressure on the head


end of the hydraulic lift cylinder. The
VIMS receives a square wave signal
that varies in frequency as the oil
pressure of the hydraulic lift cylinder
head end changes. The VIMS then
determines the pressure by the
frequency that is received from the
sensor and uses this to calculate
payload. Only positive pressures will
display.

571

TLT CYLRD
PRES

Tilt Cylinder
Rod Pressure

58

Frequency

The oil pressure on the rod end


of the hydraulic tilt cylinder. VIMS
receives an square wave signal from
the sensor that changes in frequency
as the hydraulic tilt cylinder rod end
oil pressure changes. VIMS then
determines the pressure by the
frequency that it receives from the
sensor. Only positive pressures will
display.
(continued)

138
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

572

LFT LINK POS

Lift Linkage
Position

57/58/82

PWM

This is an angle in degrees that


represents the position of the bucket
lift arms (LINKAGE). An ECM
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the position of the lift arms
change. The ECM then calculates
the position from the pulse width that
is received.

573

TLT LINK POS

Tilt Linkage
Position

57/82

PWM

An angle in degrees that represents


the position of the bucket tilt
(LINKAGE). An ECM receives a
signal that changes in pulse width
as the bucket changes position. The
ECM then calculates the position
from the pulse width that it receives.

574

LFT LVR POS

Lift Lever
Position

82

PWM

Thsi is a percentage value that


represents the position of the bucket
hydraulic lift lever within the cab
(within the full calibrated range of the
lever). This should be a value from
0% to 100%. An ECM receives this
signal that changes in pulse width as
the lift lever position changes. The
ECM then calculates the lift lever
position from the pulse width that it
receives.

575

TLT LVR POS

Tilt Lever
Position,

82

PWM

A percentage value that represents


the position of the bucket hydraulic
tilt lever within the cab (within the
full calibrated range of the lever).
This should be a value from 0% to
100%. An ECM receives this signal
that changes in pulse width as the
lift lever position changes. The ECM
then calculates the tilt lever position
from the pulse width that is received.

576

LFT RAISE
SOL1

Lift Raise
Solenoid
Number 1

82

Solenoid

Thsi is the status of the number one


pilot lift-raise solenoid that is used
to control the lift cylinders. The two
states for this solenoid are ON or
OFF.

577

LFT LOWER
SOL1

Lift Lower
Solenoid
Number 1

82

Solenoid

This is the status of the number one


pilot lift-lower solenoid that is used
to control the lift cylinders. The two
states for this solenoid are ON or
OFF.

578

TLT DMP SOL1

Tilt Dump
Solenoid
Number 1

82

Solenoid

This is the status of the number one


pilot tilt-dump solenoid that is used
to control the tilt cylinders. The two
states for this solenoid are ON or
OFF.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

139
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

579

TLT RACK
SOL1

Tilt Rack
Solenoid
Number 1

82

Solenoid

This is the status of the number one


pilot tilt-rack solenoid that is used to
rack backthe bucket cylinders. The
two states for this solenoid are ON
or OFF.

580

VAR PMP
TORQ

Variable Pump
Torque

82

Calculated

This value is calculated by the


implement ECM, and represents the
variable pump torque.

581

HYD LCK

Hydraulic Lock

82

Switch

This is the status of the hydraulic


lock function. When this is active, no
hydraulic functions will operate.

582

VAR PMP
PRES

Variable
Hydraulic Pump
Pressure

82

PWM

This is the oil pressure at the outlet


of the variable hydraulic oil pump.
The implement ECM receives a
signal that varies in pulse width as
the pressure of the variable pump
changes. The ECM then determines
the variable pump pressure from the
pulse width that is received.

583

FIXED PMP
PRES

Hydraulic Pump
Pressure

57/82

PWM

This is the hydraulic oil pressure


at the outlet of the hydraulic oil
pump. An ECM receives a signal that
varies in frequency as the hydraulic
oil pressure changes. From this
signal, the ECM then calculates the
hydraulic oil pump outlet pressure.

584

LFT LINK
SNSR

Lift Linkage
Sensor

82

PWM

This a percentage value that


represents the duty cycle of the lift
arm (linkage) sensor of the bucket.
This number may or may not go
from 0% to 100% depending on the
allowable lift range for the machine.
An ECM receives a signal that
changes in pulse width as the bucket
lift arms moves.

585

TLT LINK
SNSR

Tilt Linkage
Sensor

82

PWM

This is a percentage value that


represents the duty cycle of the tilt
(linkage) sensor for the bucket. This
number may or may not go from 0%
to 100% depending on the allowable
tilt movement of the bucket. An ECM
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width as the bucket tilt linkage moves.

586

LFT LVR SNSR

Lift Lever
Sensor

82

PWM

This is a percentage value that


represents the duty cycle of the
hydraulic lift lever sensor for the
bucket that is located in the cab. This
number may or may not go from 0%
to 100% depending on where the
stops for the lever are set. An ECM
receives a signal that changes in
pulse width (within the PWM limits of
the sensor) as the bucket hydraulic
lift lever is moved.
(continued)

140
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

587

TLT LVR SNSR

Tilt Lever
Sensor

82

PWM

This is a percentage value that


represents the duty cycle of the
hydraulic tilt lever sensor for the
bucket located in the cab. This
number may or may not go from 0%
to 100% depending on where the
stops for the lever are set. An ECM
receives a signal that varies in pulse
width (within the PWM limits of the
sensor) as the hydraulic tilt lever for
the bucket is moved.

588

TOP F PMP
CHIP

Top Front Pump


Chip

59

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the top front
pump. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

589

TOP R PMP
CHIP

Top Rear Pump


Chip

59

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the top rear
pump. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

590

RTF SWG
CHIP

Right Front
Swing (Motor)
Chip

59

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the right
front swing motor. As metal chips
collect on the magnetic contacts
of the switch, a short circuit is
made from one terminal to the
other causing a closed circuit to
ground. During normal operation,
the switch is in the open position.
The switch is considered closed
when the resistance between the two
switch terminals is between zero and
approximately 2K ohms.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

141
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

591

RTR SWG
CHIP

Right Rear
Swing (Motor)
Chip

59

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the right
rear swing motor. As metal chips
collect on the magnetic contacts
of the switch, a short circuit is
made from one terminal to the
other causing a closed circuit to
ground. During normal operation,
the switch is in the open position.
The switch is considered closed
when the resistance between the two
switch terminals is between zero and
approximately 2K ohms.

592

BTM F PMP
CHIP

Bottom Front
Pump Chip

59

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the bottom
front pump. As metal chips collect on
the magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

593

BTM R PMP
CHIP

Bottom Rear
Pump Chip

59

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the bottom
rear pump. As metal chips collect on
the magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

595

LFT CYLHD
PRES

Lift Cylinder
Head Pressure

57/58

Frequency

This is the oil pressure on the head


end of the hydraulic lift cylinder.
An ECM receives a signal from the
sensor that changes in frequency
as the hydraulic lift cylinder head
end oil pressure changes. The ECM
then calculates the pressure from the
frequency that it receives. Negative
pressures cannot be displayed.

596

TLT CYLRD
PRES

Tilt Cylinder
Rod Pressure

58

Frequency

This is the oil pressure on the rod


end of the hydraulic tilt cylinder.
An ECM receives a signal from the
sensor that varies in frequency as
the tilt cylinder rod end oil pressure
changes. The ECM then calculates
the pressure from the frequency
that is received. Negative pressures
cannot be displayed.

598

BOOM UP PLT

Boom Raise
Pilot Pressure
Switch

49

Switch

This is the status of the boom raise


pilot pressure based on the pressure
switch. The status is either HI or LO.
(continued)

142
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

599

SWG HIPLT

Swing High Pilot


Pressure

39

Switch

This is used to read the status of the


swing high pilot pressure. The status
is either HI or LO.

600

IMPL HIPRES
FLTR

Implement High
Pressure Filter

58

Switch

This is the status of the implement


high pressure hydraulic oil filter. The
status is either PLUGGED or OK.

601

PMP DRIVE
FLTR

Front Pump
Drive Filter

57

Switch

This is the status of the front pump


drive filter. The status is either OK or
PLUGGED.

704

DIF FAN RELAY

Differential Fan
Relay

49

Switch

The status of the relay that is


used to drive the fan that cools the
defferential axle oil. The status is
either ON or OFF.

705

ATMOS PRES
R

Atmospheric
Pressure Rear
Engine

34

Analog

This is the atmospheric (barometric)


pressure on the outside of the
machine. The atmospheric pressure
sensor sends to the engine ECM a
voltage that varies as the pressure
changes. The engine ECM then
calculates the pressure according to
the voltage that is received.

706

HOIST ROD
PRES

Hoist Rod End


Pressure

87

PWM

The oil pressure on the rod end of


the hydraulic tilt cylinder. An ECM
receives a square wave signal from
the sensor that changes in frequency
as the hydraulic tilt cylinder rod end
oil pressure changes. The ECM then
calculates the pressure from the
frequency that is received.

707

HOIST HD
PRES

Hoist Head End


Pressure

87

PWM

This is the oil pressure on the head


end of the hydraulic tilt cylinder.
An ECM receives a square wave
signal from the sensor that varies in
frequency as the hydraulic tilt cylinder
head end oil pressure changes. The
ECM then calculates the pressure
from the frequency that is received.

708

BODY ANGLE

Body Position
Sensor

87

PWM

This is the angle that represents the


body position. The angle is measured
in reference from the down position
(on the rail).

709

TLT CYLHD
PRES

Tilt Cylinder
Head Pressure

58

Frequency

The oil pressure on the head end of


the hydraulic tilt cylinder. An ECM
receives a square wave signal from
the sensor that changes in frequency
as the hydraulic tilt cylinder head
end oil pressure changes. The ECM
then calculates the pressure from the
frequency that is received.

710

RTF-LTF SUSP
CYL

Right Front
Minus Left Front
Suspension
Cylinder

49

Calculated

The VIMS calculates this value by


subtracting the left front suspension
cylinder pressure from the right front
suspension cylinder pressure.
(continued)

143
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

711

RTR-LTR SUSP
CYL

Right Rear
Minus Left Rear
Suspension
Cylinder

49

Calculated

The VIMS calculates this value by


subtracting the left rear suspension
cylinder pressure from the right rear
suspension cylinder pressure.

712

HOIST
SCREEN

Hoist Screen
Bypass

87

Switch

This is the status of the hydraulic


hoist screen filter. The status is either
PLUGGED or OK.

720

LTF SUSP CYL

Left Front
Suspension
Cylinder

57

Frequency

This is the pressure in the left front


suspension cylinder. The VIMS
receives a square wave signal from
the sensor that varies in frequency
with respect to the change in
pressure within the suspension
cylinder. The VIMS then determines
the pressure in the cylinder from the
frequency that is received.

721

LTR SUSP CYL

Left Rear
Suspension
Cylinder

58

Frequency

This is the pressure in the left rear


suspension cylinder. The VIMS
receives a square wave signal from
the sensor that varies in frequency
with respect to the change in
pressure within the suspension
cylinder. The VIMS then determines
the pressure in the cylinder from the
frequency that is received.

722

RTF SUSP
CYL

Right Front
Suspension
Cylinder

50/57

Frequency

This is the pressure in the right


front suspension cylinder. The VIMS
receives a square wave signal from
the sensor that varies in frequency
with respect to the change in
pressure within the suspension
cylinder. The VIMS then determines
the pressure in the cylinder from the
frequency that is received.

723

RTR SUSP
CYL

Right Rear
Suspension
Cylinder

58/50

Frequency

This is the pressure in the right


rear suspension cylinder. The VIMS
receives a square wave signal from
the sensor that varies in frequency
with respect to the change in
pressure within the suspension
cylinder. The VIMS then determines
the pressure in the cylinder from the
frequency that is received.

724

BODY ANGLE

Body Position
Angle

27

PWM

Used to read the angle of the body


position. The angle is measured in
reference from the down position (on
the rail).

725

GND SPD

Ground Speed

27/81

Frequency

The speed of the machine relative


to the ground. The sensor sends a
signal to the transmission ECM that
varies in frequency depending on
the transmission output shaft speed.
Then based on the frequency that
the transmission ECM receives, the
ground speed is determined.

Parameter
Number

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

144
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

726

BODY POS

Body Position

27

Switch

This is the position of the body (up


or down). One use of this sensor
(switch) is to relay the position of
the body to the transmission ECM.
This information is used to limit the
ground speed when the body is in
the up position.

727

BODY LVR

Body Lever

27

Switch

This is the status of the body


raise/lower lever within the cab. The
state of the body lever is UP, DOWN
OR FLOAT.

728

PAYLOAD

Payload

49

Calculated

The payload weight is calculated by


the VIMS. The weight is based on
the pressures that are measured
by the four suspension cylinders
pressure sensors. The payload can
change throughout a cycle, but the
payload value returns to zero at the
end of the payload cycle when the
body raise/lower routine is performed
(dumping of the load). (Off-higway
trucks)

729

PAYLOAD
STATUS

Payload Status

49

Calculated

This is the status of the truck in a


payload cycle. Examples of payload
status are listed below:
STOPPED EMPTY
STOPPED LOADING
TRAVELING LOADED
DUMPING
TRAVELING EMPTY

730

HAUL
DISTANCE

Haul Distance

49

Calculated

This is the distance that has been


traveled by the truck up to a present
point in a payload cycle. Haul
distance is calculated based on
ground speed and travel time.

731

RT TRL SUSP
CYL

Right Trailer
Suspension
Cylinder
Pressure

59

Frequency

This is the oil pressure within the


right trailer suspension cylinder.
The VIMS receives a square wave
signal from the sensor that changes
in frequency as the the pressure in
the left trailer suspension cylinder
changes. The VIMS then determines
the pressure in the cylinder from the
frequency that is received.

732

LT TRL SUSP
CYL

Left Trailer
Suspension
Cylinder
Pressure

59

Frequency

This is the oil pressure at the left


trailer suspension cylinder. The VIMS
receives a square wave signal from
the sensor that changes in frequency
as the the pressure in the left trailer
suspension cylinder changes. The
VIMS then determines the pressure
in the cylinder from the frequency
that is received.
(continued)

145
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

733

TRL DOOR
POS

Trailer Door
Position

59

PWM

This is the status of the trailer door.


The status is ether open or closed.
This is the door that is loacated on
the bottom of the trailer that is used
for dumping. The VIMS receives a
signal that changes in pulse width as
the trailer door position changes. The
VIMS then determines the position
from the pulse width that is received.

734

TLT CYLHD
PRES

Tilt Cylinder
Head Pressure

58

Frequency

This is the oil pressure on the head


end of the bucket tilt cylinder. The
sensor sends a ECM a square
wave signal that varies in frequency
in respect to the change in the
cylinder pressure. The ECM then
determines the pressure within the
cylinder from the frequency that iis
received. Negative pressures are not
displayed.

737

GND SPD

Ground Speed

81

Calculated

This is used to read the ground speed


of the machine with a directional
indication. The signed data indicates
the direction of travel:
Negative (-) is reverse
Positve (+) is forward

742

USER
SHUTDN

User Shutdown

36

Switch

This tells the status of the user


shutdown input. There are two
states, on and off. When in the
shutdown (ON) position (resulting
from grounding this input) the engine
ECM stops the engine.

743

SHUTDN SW

Shutdown
Switch

36

Switch

This is the status of the machine


remote shutdown switch. To activate
this switch the red guard on the
machine must be lifted and the
switch placed in the ON position. The
engine ECM reads the switch, and
after one second fuel injection will be
stopped if the engine is running, or
the engine will not be allowed to start
if not running. Once the switch has
been on, the key start switch must be
turned OFF momentarily and then
back on before the engine ECM will
allow the engine to run again.

747

SWG HIPRES
FLTR

Swing High
Pressure Filter

58

Switch

This is the status of the swing high


pressure hydraulic oil filter. The
status is either PLUGGED or OK.

749

AUTO LUBE
PRES

Auto Lube
Pressure

57/58

PWM

This is the pressure in the lubrication


line that feeds grease to the grease
injectors of the lubrication system.
The sensor that measures the
pressure sends a pulse to VIMS that
varies in width depending on the line
pressure. The VIMS then uses this
signal to calculate the lube pressure.
(Large wheel loaders)
(continued)

146
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

750

AUTO LUBE
PRES

Auto Lube
Pressure

39/57/58

PWM

This is the pressure in the lubrication


line that feeds grease to the grease
injectors of the lubrication system.
The sensor that measures the
pressure sends a pulse that varies in
width depending on the line pressure
to the VIMS. The VIMS then uses this
signal to calculate the lube pressure.
(large hydraulic excavators)

751

AUTO LUBE

Auto Lube
(Status)

49

Calculated

This is the operating status of the


auto lube solenoid. There are several
possible states. The possible states
are listed below:
ACTIVE,
PENDING
WARNING
INACTIVE
TERMINATE
(Off-highway trucks and Large
excavators)

752

ENG FAN PMP


PRES

Engine Fan
Pump Pressure

36

Analog

This is the oil pressure in the


hydraulic oil line to the engine cooling
fan hydraulic motor. The sensor
sensd a signal that varies in voltage
as the oil pressure cahanges to the
engine ECM. The engine ECM then
determines the pressure from the
voltage that is received.

753

HORN SW

Horn Switch

39

Switch

This is the status of the forward


warning horn switch. The status is
either ON or OFF.

754

SYS VOLTAGE

System Voltage

49

Calculated

This the actual voltage that exists


between the positive side of the
electrical system and frame ground.

755

BUCKET WT

Bucket Weight

49

Calculated

This is the weight of the payload in


the loader bucket. The pressure in
the lift cylinder and the position of
the lift arm are used to calculate this
value.

756

TRUCK WT

Truck Weight

49

Calculated

This is the accumulated weight


of the material that was loaded
into the truck during the present
loading cycle. This value continues
to accumulate until the loader store
bottom is pressed. At this point, the
value would be stored and cleared to
zero. (Large wheel loaders)

757

SWG PLT
PRES

Swing Pilot
Pressure

39

Switch

This is the status of the swing


pressure switch.

758

SWG PMP
PRES

Swing Pump
Pressure

39

PWM

This is the outlet pressure from the


swing pump.
(continued)

147
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

759

HYD OIL PRES

Hydraulic Oil
Pressure

39/57

PWM

This is the oil pressure in the outlet


line of the hydraulic oil pump. This
sensor sends a signal that varies
in pulse width that to an ECM. This
signal depends on the hydraulic oil
pump outlet line pressure. The ECM
then uses this signal to calculate the
hydraulic oil pressure.

760

SWG/IMP PRES
SW

Swing/
Implement Pilot
Pressure

39

Switch

This is the status of the


swing/implement pilot oil pressure
switch. The status is high when
swinging or moving an implement
and low when not swinging and not
moving an implement. The switch
is open or closed depending on the
pressure.

761

TRVL PLT
PRES

Travel Pilot
Pressure

39

Switch

This is the status of the travel pilot oil


pressure switch. Status is high when
traveling and low when not traveling.

763

TRVL ALRM
CNCL

Travel Alarm
Cancel

39

Switch

This is the status of the travel alarm


cancel switch. The switch is normally
open.

764

BOOM FLOAT
PRES

Boom Float
Pressure

39

Switch

This is the status of the boom float oil


pressure switch. The status is either
low or high.

765

BOOM FLOAT
SW

Boom Float
Switch

39

Switch

This is the status of the cab switch


used to enable or disable the boom
float function.

766

BKT OPEN SW

Bucket Open
Switch

39

Switch

This is the status of the cab switch


(trigger switch) used to open the
bucket.

767

BKT CLOSE
SW

Bucket Close
Switch

39

Switch

This is the status of the cab switch


(trigger switch) used to close the
bucket.

768

HORN SW

Horn Switch

39

Switch

This is the status of the horn switch.


The status is either ON or OFF.

770

SERVICE
CONSOLE

Service
Console

39

Switch

This is the status of the service


console door. When the service
console door is closed, the switch
is closed to ground. The service
console door is an option and is not
standard on all of the shovels. The
state is either open or closed. (large
excavator)

771

HORN

Horn

39

Solenoid

This is the status of the horn


command (output from ECM). The
status is either ON or OFF.

772

BOOM FLOAT

Boom Float

39

Solenoid

This is the status of the boom float


command (output from ECM). The
status is either ON or OFF.

773

BKT OPEN

Bucket Open

39

Solenoid

This is the status of the bucket open


command (output from ECM). The
status is either ON or OFF.

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

148
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

774

BKT CLOSE

Bucket Close

39

Solenoid

This is the status of the bucket close


command (output from ECM). The
status is either ON or OFF.

775

TRVL ALARM

Travel Alarm

39

Switch

This is the status of the travel alarm.


The status is either ON or OFF.

776

BOOM
LOWER

Boom Lower

39

Solenoid

This is the status of the engine off


lower command (output from ECM).
The status is either ON or OFF.

777

BOOM LOWER
SW

Boom Lower
Switch

39

Switch

This is the status of the cab switch


that is used to lower the boom when
the engine is not running.

778

ETHER INJECT
SW

Ether Injection
Switch

36

Switch

The position of the ether injection


switch in the cab. This is the switch
which the operator uses to manually
inject ether for starting. The switch is
either OFF or ON (manual injection).

779

AESC

Automatic
Engine Speed
Control

36

Switch

This is the status of the AESC


pressure switch. If the engine ECM
receives an signal from AESC
pressure switch notifying that the
hydraulics are being used, then no
action is taken. But, if the hydraulics
are not being used, the engine ECM
idles the engine down to a specified
speed to save fuel and reduce engine
wear. As soon as the hydraulics
begin to be used again, the engine
speed is again elevated. AESC state
is either ON or OFF.

780

START RELAY

Start Relay

51

Switch

This is the status of the start relay.


When the engine is cranking, the
start relay is engaged.

781

KEY START
SW

Key Start Switch

51

Switch

The status of the key start switch.


The status is either ON, OFF or
CRANK.

782

AESC ENABL
SW
AESC ENABLE
SW(HEX)

Automatic
Engine Speed
Control Enable
Switch

36/49

Switch

This is the status (ACTIVE or


INACTIVE) of the Engine Speed
Control Automatic Enable switch.

783

AESC CTRL
LINE

Automatic
Engine Speed
Control Line

36/39

Switch

This is the status of the AESC output


line from the macine ECM to the
engine ECM.

785

PAYLOAD SW

Payload Switch

39

Switch

This is the status of the payload store


switch. The switch is normally in
the open position. When the switch
is pressed, a grounded signal is
received, telling the VIMS to store the
payload data that has been collected
since the last store and to clear the
present payload data. The switch is
either ON or OFF.
(continued)

149
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

786

HOIST OVER
CTR

Hoist Over
center

87

Calculated

This the status of the hoist


overrunning load control. This
indicates when the ECM is trying to
control the body so an overrunning
load will not damage the machine.

787

HOIST POS
CC

Hoist Lever
Position from
Chassis Control

87

Analog

This is used to read the hoist lever


mode and the mode drive command
percentage. The drive percentage,
used by the RAISE, FLOAT, and
LOWER modes, indicates the
position of the lever within the range
of travel for the particular mode.

788

HOIST STATUS
CC

Hoist Status
from Chassis
Control

87

Analog

Used to read the actual hoist


output status and drive command
percentage. The drive percentage,
used by the RAISE, FLOAT, LOWER
and SNUB modes, indicates the
position of the lever within the range
of travel for the particular mode.

790

ATMOS PRES

Atmospheric
Pressure

36

Analog

This is the atmospheric (barometric)


pressure on the outside of the
machine. The atmospheric pressure
sensor sends a voltage that varies
as the pressure changes to the
engine ECM. The engine ECM then
calculates the pressure according to
the voltage that is received.

791

AMB AIR
TEMP

Ambient Air
Temperature

57

PWM

This is the temperature of the air


outside the machine. The VIMS
receives a signal that changes in
pulse width as the outside or ambient
air temperature changes. The VIMS
then uses the pulse width that is
received to determine the ambient air
temperature.

792

MACHINE
PITCH

Machine Pitch

49

Calculated

This is calculated from the pressures


that are measured by the four
machine suspension cylinder
pressure sensors. The VIMS takes
the sum of the two front suspension
cylinder pressures minus the sum
of the two rear suspension cylinder
pressures.

793

MACHINE
RACK

Machine Rack

49

Calculated

This is calculated from the pressures


that are measured by the four
machine suspension cylinder
pressure sensors. The VIMS
takes the sum of the two diagonal
suspension cylinder pressures (left
front plus right rear or right front plus
left rear) minus the sum of the two
other diagonal suspension cylinder
pressures.

794

ATMOS PRES
F

Engine
Atmospheric
Pressure Front

33

Analog

This is the air pressure at the inlet


to the intake manifold of the front
engine. (see parameter 790)

Parameter
Number

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

(continued)

150
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

795

REEL LUBE
SW

Reel Lube
Switch

57

Switch

The status of the reel lube switch


(ON or OFF). The reel lube switch
will turn the lubrication system on to
actuate the manual lube reel.This is
an alternate lubrication system from
the auto lube system. This system
overrides the auto lube system.
While this switch is on, the auto lube
status will be pending.

798

HOIST LVR POS

Hoist Level
Position

49

Calculated

This indicates the hoist lever modes.


The hoist lever modes are listed
below:
RAISE
LOWER
HOLD
FLOAT

799

HOIST
STATUS

Desired Hoist
Status

27

Calculated

The desired mode and drive


percentage of the hoist for operation.
The drive percentage, used by the
RAISE, FLOAT, and LOWER modes,
indicates the desired lever position
within the range of travel for the
particular mode.

800

VIMS EVENT
LIST

VIMS Event List

49

Calculated

This is a percentage value that


represents the amount of memory
space (out of the total) that is left for
the VIMS Event List.

801

PAYLOAD
DATA

Payload Data

49

Calculated

This is a percentage value that


represents the amount of memory
space (out of the total) that is left
for storing of payload data. This is
calculated by VIMS on off highway
trucks.

802

VIMS
SNAPSHOT

VIMS Snapshot

49

Calculated

This is a percentage value that


represents the amount of memory
space (out of the total) that is left for
storing of the VIMS Snapshot data
(previously named event recorder
data). This value will either be
100, 50, or 0 percent. Every time a
snapshot is activated (manually or
automatically), the VIMS snapshot
value should be reduced by 50
percent. This value can only be reset
by downloading the VIMS snapshot
data.

803

PAYLOAD
MEMORY

Payload
Memory

49

Calculated

This is a percentage value that


represents the amount of memory
space (out of the total) that is left for
storing of the payload data. This is
calculated by VIMS on large wheel
loaders.
(continued)

151
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

804

PWR SHIFT
PRES

Power Shift
Pressure

36

PWM

This is the power shift pressure that


is used to control the swash plates
on the hydraulic oil pumps. The
engine ECM receives a signal that
changes in pulse width as the power
shift pressure changes. The engine
ECM then uses the pulse width that
is received to determine the power
shift pressure.

805

VIDS EVENT
LIST

VIDS Event List

49

Calculated

This is a percentage value that


represents the amount of memory
space (out of the total) that is left for
the VIDS Event List data.

806

PWR SHIFT

Power Shift

36

Calculated

This is the current as a percentage


of maximum that is delivered to the
power shift solenoid.

850

MAX PITCH/
SEC

Maximum Pitch
Per Second

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

851

MAX RACK/
SEC

Maximum Rack
Per Second

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

852

CURRENT
FELA

Current FELA

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

853

MOV AVG1
FELA

Moving Average
Number 1 FELA

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

854

MOV AVG2
FELA

Moving Average
Number 2 FELA

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

855

MOV AVG 3
FELA

Moving Average
Number 3 FELA

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

856

RUN AVG
FELA

Running
Average FELA

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

857

CUM FELA
UPD

Cumulative
FELA Update

49

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

860

MANUAL
EREC

Manual Event
Recorder

49

Switch

This is the status of the manual event


recorder. The status is either OFF or
RECORDING.

862

CUR R FELA

Current Rear
FELA

87

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

863

MOV AVG1 R
FELA

Moving Average
Number 1 Rear
FELA

87

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

864

MOV AVG3 R
FELA

Moving Average
Number 3 Rear
FELA

87

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

865

MOV AVG5 R
FELA

Moving Average
Number 5 Rear
FELA

87

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.

866

RUN AVG R
FELA

Running
Average Rear
FELA

87

Calculated

This is used with Chassis electronic


control module.
(continued)

152
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

875

ATTACH
CODE

Attachment
Code

39

Calculated

This reads the machine attachment


code.

876

EXH TEMP DEV


LTF

Exhaust
Temperature
Deviation Left
Front

49

Calculated

This is the difference between the left


front exhaust and the three remaning
exhaust banks.

877

EXH TEMP DEV


LTR

Exhaust
Temperature
Deviation Left
Rear

49

Calculated

The difference between left rear


exhaust and the three remaning
exhaust banks.

878

EXH TEMP DEV


RTF

Exhaust
Temperature
Deviation Right
Front

49

calculated

The difference between right front


exhaust and the three remaning
exhaust banks.

879

EXH TEMP DEV


RTR

Exhaust
Temperature
Deviation Right
Rear

49

Calculated

The difference between right rear


exhaust and the three remaning
exhaust banks.

900

LOADING
TIME

Loading Time

49

Calculated

This is the total time that the machine


has spent loading in a given payload
cycle.

901

STOP EMPTY
TIME

Stopped Empty
Time

49

Calculated

This is the total time that the machine


has been stopped while empty in a
given payload cycle.

902

TRVL EMPTY
TIME

Travel Empty
Time

49

Calculated

This is the total time that the machine


has been traveling while empty in a
given payload cycle.

903

STOP LOADED
TIME

Stop Loaded
Time

49

Calculated

This is the total time that the machine


has been stopped while loaded in a
given payload cycle.

904

TRVL LOADED
TIME

Travel Loaded
Time

49

Calculated

This is the total amount of time that


a machine has been traveling while
loaded in a given payload cycle.

905

THROTTL LCK
SPD

Throttle Lock
Speed

36

Calculated

This is the throttle lock speed that


was set by the operator with the
throttle lock set switch. This is only
valid if the throttle lock ON/OFF
switch is in the ON position.

907

LOW OIL
PRES

Low Oil
Pressure

36

Switch

This notifies the VIMS when engine


oil pressure is low. The switch is
isolated from ground when the oil
pressure is low. In normal operation,
the switch is grounded.
(continued)

153
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

910

LT FNL DRV
CHIP

Left Final Drive


Chip Detector
Level

50

Switch

This switch notifies the VIMS if chips


have been detected in the left final
drive. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

912

RT FNL DR
CHIP

Right Final
Drive Chip
Detector Level

50

Switch

This switch notifies VIMS if chips


have been detected in the right final
drive. As metal chips collect on the
magnetic contacts of the switch,
a short circuit is made from one
terminal to the other causing a closed
circuit to ground. During normal
operation, the switch is in the open
position. The switch is considered
closed when the resistance between
the two switch terminals is between
zero and approximately 2K ohms.

913

LT FNL DRV
TEMP

Left Final Drive


Oil Temperature

49/50

PWM

This is the temperature in the left


final drive.

914

RT FNL DRV
TEMP

Right
Final Drive
Temperature

49/50

PWM

This is the temperature in the right


final drive.

7107

INJ DISABLD

Engine Injection
Disalbled

36

Calculated

The engine status parameter is


monitored in order to see if the
injectors have been disabled.

7108

OIL PRES F
SHTDN

Oil Pressure
Front Shutdown
Status

33

Calculated

This parameter senses if the front


engine has been shutdown due to
low oil pressure. The engine ECM will
turn off the Rear Low Oil Pressure
status immediatly when the rear
engine is shutdown. This parameter
looks for a change of state in the low
oil pressure status from LO to OK
and the injection disabled from OFF
to ON.

7109

TRN OIL PRES


LO

Transmission
Oil Pressure
Low

116

Calculated

Monoitors the low region of the


transmission oil pressure.

7110

TRN OIL PRES


HI

Transmission
Oil Pressure
High

116

Calculated

This monitors the region of high


transmission oil pressure.
(continued)

154
Systems Operation Section

(Table 22, contd)

VIMS Parameter Description List


Parameter
Number

VIMS
Abbreviated
Name

VIMS
Full
Name

Source
Module(s)

Signal
Type

Parameter Description

7112

OIL PRES R
SHUTDN

Oil Pressure
Rear Shutdown
Status

34

Calculated

This parameter senses if the rear


engine has been shutdown due to
low oil pressure. The engine ECM will
turn off the Rear Low Oil Pressure
status immediatly when the rear
engine is shutdown. This parameter
looks for a change of state in the low
oil pressure status from LO to OK
and the status of injection disabled
from OFF to ON.

7701

RETRDR LVR

Retarder Lever
Position

116

PWM

This reads the position of the auto


retarder lever. This signal is a
percentage of full travel.

7738

AUTO RETRDR
SW

Automatic
Retarder
Pressure Switch
Status

116

Switch

This shows the state of the ARC


pressure switch. The ARC pressure
is either HI or LO.

573
Index Section

Index
A
Action Alarm .......................................................... 97
Action Lamp........................................................... 97
Alert Indicator - Troubleshoot .............................. 487
Troubleshooting The Action Lamp ................... 489
Attachment Code - Configure ................................ 20
B
Battery - Replace................................................. 521
Procedure ........................................................ 521
C
Cable Connections .............................................. 522
Connections of the Radio Telemetry System
(Broadcast) .................................................... 523
Data Connections (OHT) ................................. 524
Power Connections (OHT) ............................... 524
Printer Cable (Payload) for Large Wheel Loader
....................................................................... 522
Calibration Mode - Enter........................................ 21
Charging System - Test ....................................... 503
Alternator Specifications .................................. 511
Initial Troubleshooting Procedure..................... 503
T1 Alternator Output - Test .............................. 505
T2a - Test For Machines Equipped With A Main
Disconnect Switch.......................................... 506
T2b - Test For Any Machine ............................. 506
T3 Charging System - Test .............................. 507
T4 Alternator Drive System - Check ................ 508
T5 Alternator Current - Test ............................. 508
T6 Residual Magnetism Restoration................ 508
T7 Identifying Source Of Current Draw - Test .. 509
T8a- Alternator Overcharging - Test................. 509
T8b - Alternator Overcharging - Test
(Continued) .................................................... 510
Chip Detector - Test............................................. 490
CID 0041 FMI 03 Sensor Power Supply (8 DCV)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 209
CID 0041 FMI 04 Sensor Power Supply (8 DCV)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 210
CID 0041 FMI 06 Sensor Power Supply (8 DCV)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 211
CID 0075 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 212
CID 0075 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 214
CID 0075 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Steering Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 215
CID 0096 FMI 03 Level Sensor (Fuel) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 217
CID 0096 FMI 04 Level Sensor (Fuel) Voltage Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 218
CID 0096 FMI 06 Level Sensor (Fuel) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 220

CID 0100 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)


Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 221
CID 0100 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 223
CID 0100 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 224
CID 0110 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Engine
Coolant) Voltage Above Normal - Test............... 225
CID 0110 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Engine
Coolant) Voltage Below Normal - Test ............... 227
CID 0110 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Engine
Coolant) Current Above Normal - Test............... 228
CID 0127 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Transmission Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 229
CID 0127 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Transmission Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 231
CID 0127 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Transmission Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 232
CID 0171 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Ambient Air)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 233
CID 0171 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Ambient Air)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 235
CID 0171 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Ambient Air)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 237
CID 0177 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Transmission
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 238
CID 0177 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Transmission
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 240
CID 0177 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Transmission
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 241
CID 0190 FMI 02 Speed Sensor (Engine) Incorrect
Signal - Test ....................................................... 242
CID 0190 FMI 03 Speed Sensor (Engine) Voltage
Above Normal - Test .......................................... 244
CID 0190 FMI 04 Speed Sensor (Engine) Voltage
Below Normal - Test........................................... 245
CID 0190 FMI 08 Speed Sensor (Engine) Abnormal
Signal - Test ....................................................... 246
CID 0248 FMI 09 CAT Data Link Abnormal Update Test .................................................................... 247
CID 0262 FMI 03 Sensor Power Supply (5 DCV)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 249
CID 0262 FMI 04 Sensor Power Supply (5 DCV)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 250
CID 0262 FMI 06 Sensor Power Supply (5 DCV)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 251
CID 0263 FMI 03 Sensor Power Supply (8 or 12
DCV) Voltage Above Normal - Test.................... 251
CID 0263 FMI 04 Sensor Power Supply (8 or 12
DCV) Voltage Below Normal - Test.................... 252
CID 0263 FMI 06 Sensor Power Supply (8 or 12
DCV) Current Above Normal - Test ................... 253
CID 0271 FMI 03 Alarm (Action) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 254
CID 0271 FMI 05 Alarm (Action) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 255
CID 0271 FMI 06 Alarm (Action) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 256

574
Index Section

CID 0279 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Front


Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 257
CID 0279 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Front
Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 259
CID 0279 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Front
Aftercooler Coolant) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 261
CID 0280 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 262
CID 0280 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 264
CID 0280 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Pump Drive)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 265
CID 0295 FMI 02 Electronic Control Module
(Machine) Incorrect Signal - Test ....................... 266
CID 0295 FMI 09 Electronic Control Module
(Machine) Abnormal Update - Test.................... 268
CID 0295 FMI 12 Electronic Control Module
(Machine) Failed - Test ...................................... 270
CID 0296 FMI 02 Power Train Electronic Control
Module (Electronic Clutch Pressure Control)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 272
CID 0296 FMI 09 Power Train Electronic Control
Module (Electronic Clutch Pressure Control)
Abnormal Update) - Test.................................... 274
CID 0296 FMI 12 Power Train Electronic Control
Module (Electronic Clutch Pressure Control) Failed Test .................................................................... 276
CID 0324 FMI 03 Lamp (Action) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 278
CID 0324 FMI 05 Lamp (Action) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 278
CID 0324 FMI 06 Lamp (Action) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 279
CID 0341 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 281
CID 0341 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Current Below Normal - Test.............................. 281
CID 0341 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 282
CID 0341 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 4) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test ................... 282
CID 0350 FMI 00 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Above Normal Range - Test............................... 283
CID 0350 FMI 01 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Below Normal Range - Test ............................... 283
CID 0350 FMI 02 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 284
CID 0350 FMI 03 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 284
CID 0350 FMI 04 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 285
CID 0350 FMI 06 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 285
CID 0350 FMI 08 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Abnormal Signal - Test ...................................... 286
CID 0350 FMI 11 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test ................... 286

CID 0350 FMI 13 Position Sensor (Lift Linkage) Out


of Calibration - Test............................................ 287
CID 0364 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Lift Cylinder
Head End) Voltage Below Normal - Test ........... 287
CID 0364 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Lift Cylinder
Head End) Voltage Below Normal - Test ........... 287
CID 0364 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Lift Cylinder
Head End) Current Above Normal - Test ........... 287
CID 0371 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Voltage
Above Normal - Test .......................................... 287
CID 0371 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Current
Below Normal - Test........................................... 288
CID 0371 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Current
Above Normal - Test .......................................... 289
CID 0371 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (Air Horn) Failure
Mode Not Identifiable - Test ............................... 289
CID 0378 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Voltage Above Normal - Test ......... 290
CID 0378 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Current Below Normal - Test.......... 291
CID 0378 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Current Above Normal - Test ......... 292
CID 0378 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (Automatic
Lubrication) Failure Mode Not Identifiable Test .................................................................... 293
CID 0379 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Automatic
Lubrication) Voltage Above Normal - Test ......... 293
CID 0379 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Automatic
Lubrication) Voltage Below Normal - Test.......... 295
CID 0379 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Automatic
Lubrication) Current Above Normal - Test ......... 297
CID 0425 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Front Brake Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 298
CID 0425 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Front Brake Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 300
CID 0425 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Front Brake Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 301
CID 0426 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Rear Brake Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 302
CID 0426 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Rear Brake Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 304
CID 0426 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Rear Brake Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 305
CID 0427 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Front Axle
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 306
CID 0427 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Front Axle
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 308
CID 0427 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Front Axle
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 309
CID 0428 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Rear Axle
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 310
CID 0428 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Rear Axle
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 312
CID 0428 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Rear Axle
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 313
CID 0429 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 314
CID 0429 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Steering Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 316
CID 0429 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Steering Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 317

575
Index Section

CID 0430 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Steering Pilot


Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 318
CID 0430 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Steering Pilot
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 320
CID 0430 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Steering Pilot
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 321
CID 0434 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Hydraulic Pilot
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 322
CID 0434 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Hydraulic Pilot
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 324
CID 0434 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Hydraulic Pilot
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 325
CID 0436 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Torque Converter
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 326
CID 0436 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Torque Converter
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 328
CID 0436 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Torque Converter
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 329
CID 0438 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 330
CID 0438 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Current Below Normal - Test.............................. 331
CID 0438 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 331
CID 0438 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 1) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test ................... 332
CID 0439 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 333
CID 0439 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Current Below Normal - Test.............................. 333
CID 0439 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 334
CID 0439 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 2) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test ................... 334
CID 0440 FMI 03 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 335
CID 0440 FMI 05 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)
Current Below Normal - Test.............................. 336
CID 0440 FMI 06 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 336
CID 0440 FMI 11 Solenoid Valve (No. 3) (Warm Up)
Failure Mode Not Identifiable - Test ................... 337
CID 0457 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Brake Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 338
CID 0457 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Brake Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 339
CID 0457 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Brake Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 340
CID 0458 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Tilt Cylinder Rod)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 342
CID 0458 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Tilt Cylinder Rod)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 342
CID 0458 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Tilt Cylinder Rod)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 342
CID 0533 FMI 02 Machine Electronic Control Module
(Integrated Brake) Incorrect Signal - Test .......... 342
CID 0533 FMI 09 Machine Electronic Control Module
(Integrated Brake) Abnormal Update - Test ....... 344
CID 0533 FMI 12 Machine Electronic Control Module
(Integrated Brake) Failed - Test.......................... 346
CID 0541 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Differential Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 348

CID 0541 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Differential Oil)


Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 350
CID 0541 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Differential Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 351
CID 0562 FMI 02 Caterpillar Monitoring System
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 352
CID 0562 FMI 09 Caterpillar Monitoring System
Abnormal Update - Test..................................... 354
CID 0562 FMI 12 Caterpillar Monitoring System
Failed - Test ....................................................... 356
CID 0590 FMI 02 Electronic Control Module (Engine)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 358
CID 0590 FMI 09 Electronic Control Module (Engine)
Abnormal Update - Test..................................... 360
CID 0590 FMI 12 Electronic Control Module (Engine)
Failed - Test ....................................................... 362
CID 0596 FMI 02 Electronic Control Module
(Implement) Incorrect Signal - Test.................... 364
CID 0596 FMI 09 Electronic Control Module
(Implement) Abnormal Update - Test................. 366
CID 0596 FMI 12 Electronic Control Module
(Implement) Failed - Test ................................... 368
CID 0600 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Hydraulic Oil)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 370
CID 0600 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Hydraulic Oil)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 372
CID 0600 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Hydraulic Oil)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 374
CID 0650 FMI 02 Harness Code Incorrect - Test.. 375
CID 0654 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Right
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 376
CID 0654 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Right
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test............. 378
CID 0654 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Right
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 379
CID 0655 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Left
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 380
CID 0655 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Left
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test............. 381
CID 0655 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Left
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 382
CID 0656 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Inlet) Voltage Above Normal - Test ... 383
CID 0656 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Inlet) Voltage Below Normal - Test.... 385
CID 0656 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Inlet) Current Above Normal - Test ... 386
CID 0657 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Outlet) Voltage Above Normal - Test.. 387
CID 0657 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Outlet) Voltage Below Normal - Test.. 388
CID 0657 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Trailer Brake
Oil Cooler Outlet) Current Above Normal - Test.. 389
CID 0658 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test..... 390
CID 0658 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 391
CID 0658 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 391

576
Index Section

CID 0658 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Right


Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 391
CID 0659 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test..... 391
CID 0659 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 391
CID 0659 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 391
CID 0659 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Trailer Left
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 392
CID 0672 FMI 01 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Below Normal Range - Test .................. 392
CID 0672 FMI 02 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Incorrect Signal - Test ........................... 392
CID 0672 FMI 03 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Voltage Above Normal - Test ................ 394
CID 0672 FMI 04 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Voltage Below Normal - Test................. 395
CID 0672 FMI 08 Speed Sensor (Torque Converter
Output) Abnormal Signal - Test ......................... 396
CID 0767 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Fixed
Displacement Pump Oil) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 397
CID 0767 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Fixed
Displacement Pump Oil) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 399
CID 0767 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Fixed
Displacement Pump Oil) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 400
CID 0801 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 1) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 401
CID 0802 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 2) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 401
CID 0803 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 3) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0804 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 4) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0805 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 5) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0806 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 6) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0807 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 7) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0808 FMI 09 Interface Module (No. 8) Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 402
CID 0809 FMI 02 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 1) Incorrect Signal - Test ............................ 403
CID 0809 FMI 12 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 1) Failed - Test ........................................... 403
CID 0810 FMI 02 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 2) Incorrect Signal - Test ............................ 403
CID 0810 FMI 12 Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(No. 2) Failed - Test ........................................... 403
CID 0811 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 1)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 403
CID 0811 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 1) Failed
- Test .................................................................. 403

CID 0812 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 2)


Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 403
CID 0812 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 2) Failed
- Test .................................................................. 403
CID 0813 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 3)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 404
CID 0813 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 3) Failed
- Test .................................................................. 404
CID 0814 FMI 02 Quad Gauge Module (No. 4)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 404
CID 0814 FMI 12 Quad Gauge Module (No. 4) Failed
- Test .................................................................. 404
CID 0815 FMI 02 Message Center Module (No. 1)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 404
CID 0815 FMI 12 Message Center Module (No. 1)
Failed - Test ....................................................... 404
CID 0816 FMI 02 Message Center Module (No. 2)
Incorrect Signal - Test ........................................ 404
CID 0816 FMI 12 Message Center Module (No. 2)
Failed - Test ....................................................... 404
CID 0817 FMI 02 Battery (Internal Backup) Incorrect
- Test .................................................................. 405
CID 0817 FMI 12 Battery (Internal Backup) Failed Test .................................................................... 405
CID 0819 FMI 02 Display Data Link Incorrect Test .................................................................... 405
CID 0819 FMI 03 Display Data Link Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 405
CID 0819 FMI 06 Display Data Link Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 406
CID 0819 FMI 12 Display Data Link Failed - Test.. 406
CID 0820 FMI 02 Keypad Data Link Incorrect Test .................................................................... 406
CID 0820 FMI 03 Keypad Data Link Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 407
CID 0820 FMI 06 Keypad Data Link Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 407
CID 0820 FMI 12 Keypad Data Link Failed Test .................................................................... 408
CID 0821 FMI 03 Display Power Supply Voltage
Above Normal - Test .......................................... 408
CID 0821 FMI 06 Display Power Supply Current
Above Normal - Test .......................................... 409
CID 0822 FMI 03 Display Backlighting Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 409
CID 0822 FMI 05 Display Backlighting Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 410
CID 0822 FMI 06 Display Backlighting Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 410
CID 0823 FMI 03 Lamp (Service) Voltage Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 411
CID 0823 FMI 05 Lamp (Service) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 412
CID 0823 FMI 06 Lamp (Service) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 413
CID 0824 FMI 03 Lamp (Green Payload) Voltage
Above Normal - Test .......................................... 414
CID 0824 FMI 05 Lamp (Green Payload) Current
Below Normal - Test........................................... 414
CID 0824 FMI 06 Lamp (Green Payload) Current
Above Normal - Test .......................................... 415

577
Index Section

CID 0825 FMI 03 Lamp (Red Payload) Voltage Above


Normal - Test ..................................................... 416
CID 0825 FMI 05 Lamp (Red Payload) Current Below
Normal - Test ..................................................... 417
CID 0825 FMI 06 Lamp (Red Payload) Current Above
Normal - Test ..................................................... 418
CID 0826 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ...... 419
CID 0826 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ...... 421
CID 0826 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Current Above Normal - Test...... 422
CID 0826 FMI 11 Temperature Sensor (Torque
Converter Oil) Failure Mode Not Identifiable Test .................................................................... 424
CID 0827 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 424
CID 0827 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 426
CID 0827 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 427
CID 0827 FMI 08 Temperature Sensor (Left Exhaust)
Abnormal Signal - Test ...................................... 428
CID 0828 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) Voltage Above Normal - Test .............. 429
CID 0828 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) Voltage Below Normal - Test .............. 431
CID 0828 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) Current Above Normal - Test .............. 432
CID 0828 FMI 08 Temperature Sensor (Right
Exhaust) - Test................................................... 434
CID 0829 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Rear
Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 435
CID 0829 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Rear
Aftercooler Coolant) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 436
CID 0829 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Rear
Aftercooler Coolant) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 437
CID 0830 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Front Brake
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 439
CID 0830 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Front Brake
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 440
CID 0830 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Front Brake
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 441
CID 0833 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Rear Brake
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 442
CID 0833 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Rear Brake
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 444
CID 0833 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Rear Brake
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 445
CID 0835 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Differential
Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test....................... 446
CID 0835 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Differential
Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test ....................... 447
CID 0835 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Differential
Oil) Current Above Normal - Test....................... 449
CID 0838 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test..... 450
CID 0838 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 450

CID 0838 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Left Front


Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 450
CID 0838 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 450
CID 0838 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Left Front
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 450
CID 0839 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test..... 451
CID 0839 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 451
CID 0839 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 451
CID 0839 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 451
CID 0839 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Right Front
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 451
CID 0840 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 451
CID 0840 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 452
CID 0840 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 452
CID 0840 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 452
CID 0840 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Left Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 452
CID 0841 FMI 02 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Incorrect Signal - Test..... 452
CID 0841 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Above Normal Test .................................................................... 452
CID 0841 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Voltage Below Normal Test .................................................................... 453
CID 0841 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Current Above Normal Test .................................................................... 453
CID 0841 FMI 08 Pressure Sensor (Right Rear
Suspension Cylinder) Abnormal Signal - Test ... 453
CID 0849 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Air System)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 453
CID 0849 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Air System)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 455
CID 0849 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Air System)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 457
CID 0851 FMI 03 Pressure Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Above Normal - Test ............................. 458
CID 0851 FMI 04 Pressure Sensor (Pump Drive)
Voltage Below Normal - Test.............................. 460
CID 0851 FMI 06 Pressure Sensor (Pump Drive)
Current Above Normal - Test ............................. 462
CID 0852 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Right Front
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 463

578
Index Section

CID 0852 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Right Front


Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test............. 465
CID 0852 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Right Front
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 466
CID 0853 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Left Front
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 467
CID 0853 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Left Front
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test............. 469
CID 0853 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Left Front
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 470
CID 0854 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Right Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 472
CID 0854 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Right Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test............. 473
CID 0854 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Right Rear
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 474
CID 0855 FMI 03 Temperature Sensor (Left Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Above Normal - Test ............ 476
CID 0855 FMI 04 Temperature Sensor (Left Rear
Brake Oil) Voltage Below Normal - Test............. 477
CID 0855 FMI 06 Temperature Sensor (Left Rear
Brake Oil) Current Above Normal - Test ............ 478
CID 0890 FMI 09 Telemetry Data Link Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 480
CID 1089 FMI 02 Analysis Control Module Incorrect
Signal - Test ....................................................... 481
CID 1089 FMI 09 Analysis Control Module Abnormal
Update - Test ..................................................... 483
CID 1089 FMI 12 Analysis Control Module Failed Test .................................................................... 484
Component Descriptions ....................................... 68
D
Data Connectors.................................................... 96
Data Logger - Reset .............................................. 21
Data Logger - Start/Stop ....................................... 22
Diode Assembly - Test ......................................... 519
Display Backlighting - Set ...................................... 22
Display Contrast - Set............................................ 23
Display Language - Set ......................................... 23
Display Modules .................................................... 76
Display Units - Set ................................................. 23
E
Event - Configure...................................................
Event Acknowledged - Show .................................
Event List - Show...................................................
Event Recorder - Start...........................................
Event Statistics - Show..........................................

23
25
25
26
27

I
Important Safety Information ................................... 2
Interface Module.................................................... 74
K
Keypad...................................................................
F1 Key ............................................................
F2 Key ............................................................
F3 Key ............................................................
FORWARD and BACKWARD Arrow Keys .........
GAUGE Key.....................................................
ID Key .............................................................
Numeric Keys (0 - 9) .........................................
OK Key...............................................................

85
88
89
89
88
87
86
86
86

L
Lift or Tilt Cylinder Sensor - Troubleshoot ........... 491
Lift or Tilt Cylinder Sensor Dynamic - Test....... 494
Lift or Tilt Cylinder Sensor Signal Voltage Test................................................................. 491
Loader Payload System (LPS) General
Information........................................................... 41
LPS Calibration...................................................... 43
Check Calibration Information............................ 43
Check the Weigh Range .................................... 44
Enter the Calibration Weight ............................. 46
Enter the Carryback Weight............................... 45
Set the Weigh Range......................................... 44
Start a New Calibration...................................... 47
LPS Menu Functions Summary............................. 42
Lubrication Interval - Set ....................................... 27
Lubrication Manual - Start ..................................... 28
M
Machine Status - Show.......................................... 28
Main Module .......................................................... 69
Message Center Module ....................................... 79
Message Center Abbreviations.......................... 80
Module - Replace ................................................ 521
Procedure ........................................................ 521
N
Normal Operation .................................................. 18
O

G
Odometer - Set ...................................................... 29
General Information......................................... 9, 155
Quick Reference .............................................. 156
Glossary of Terms ............................................... 535

579
Index Section

Off-Board Service Tool ........................................


Connection Procedure for VIMS-PC to VIMS ..
Related Support Material .................................
Uploading the Source Software and the
Configuration Software...................................

524
526
526
528

P
Parameters .......................................................... 100
Payload Lamps ...................................................... 98
Position Sensor (Lift Arm) - Adjust ...................... 520
Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor - Test ..... 512
Identification of Sensor Wire and Contacts ..... 512
Procedure ........................................................ 513
Q
Quad Gauge Module ............................................. 77
R
Related Components............................................. 99
Diode Assemblies .............................................. 99
Service Key Switch .......................................... 100
Solenoids ........................................................... 99
Resettable Totals - Reset ...................................... 30
Resettable Totals - Show ....................................... 30
Large Hydraulic Excavators ............................... 30
Off-Highway Trucks ............................................ 30
S
Sensor Dynamic Test........................................... 516
Procedure ........................................................ 518
Sensor Signal Voltage - Test ............................... 513
Procedure ........................................................ 515
Sensors ................................................................. 92
Frequency Sensors ............................................ 92
Pulse Width Modulated Sensors (PWM)............ 94
Resistive Sensors .............................................. 93
Service Lamp ........................................................ 98
Service Lamp - Reset............................................ 31
Service Lamp - Set................................................ 31
Service Operations................................................ 19
Service Tools ....................................................... 156
Snapshot Trigger - Configure ................................ 34
Speed Sensor (Engine) - Adjust .......................... 520
Speedometer/Tachometer Module ........................ 78
Suspension Cylinder Sensor - Troubleshoot ....... 495
Payload System - Troubleshoot ....................... 498

Switches ................................................................ 89
Automatic Lubrication Grease Level Switch
(LWL)................................................................ 92
Chip Detector Switch (LHEX) ............................ 90
Coolant Flow Switch .......................................... 91
Filter Indicator Switches..................................... 90
Oil Level Switch.................................................. 89
Pump Inlet Valve Switch (LHEX)........................ 89
Steering Flow Switches...................................... 90
Steering Pressure Switch .................................. 91
System Schematic............................................... 546
5130 and 5230 VIMS Interface Module No. 1 .. 560
5130 and 5230 VIMS Interface Module No. 2 .. 561
5130 and 5230 VIMS Main Module ................. 559
5130B VIMS Interface Module No. 1................ 557
5130B VIMS Interface Module No. 2................ 558
5130B VIMS Main Module ............................... 556
785B, 789B and 793B VIMS Interface Module No.
1 .................................................................... 554
785B, 789B and 793B VIMS Interface Module No.
2 .................................................................... 555
785B, 789B and 793B VIMS Main Module ..... 553
785C and 789C VIMS Interface Module No. 1.. 551
785C and 789C VIMS Interface Module No. 2
....................................................................... 552
785C and 789C VIMS Main Module ............... 550
793C VIMS Interface Module No. 1 ................. 548
793C VIMS Interface Module No. 2 ................ 549
793C VIMS Main Module Schematic ............... 547
992G VIMS Interface Module No. 1 ................ 563
992G VIMS Interface Module No. 2 ................ 564
992G VIMS Main Module ................................ 562
994 VIMS Interface Module No. 1 ................... 566
994 VIMS Interface Module No. 2 ................... 567
994 VIMS Main Module ................................... 565
994D VIMS Interface Module No. 1 ................ 569
994D VIMS Interface Module No. 2 ................ 570
994D VIMS Main Module ................................ 568
VIMS 9.0X or Later Class of Onboard Software
Update Worksheet ......................................... 571
System Self Test.................................................... 36
Systems Operation Section ..................................... 9
T
Table of Contents..................................................... 3
Testing and Adjusting .......................................... 155
Testing and Adjusting Section ............................. 155
TPS Accuracy........................................................ 67
Distance Measurements .................................... 68
Time Measurements .......................................... 68
Weight Measurements ....................................... 67
TPS Component Function ..................................... 54
TPS Maximum Payload Speed Manager............... 62
Operation of the Maximum Payload Speed
Manager ........................................................... 62
Setup of the Maximum Payload Speed
Manager ........................................................... 64

TPS Normal Operation .......................................... 57


Automatic Calibration Adjustment...................... 59
Automatic Payload Communication ................... 59
Basic Loading and Weighing ............................ 57
Collapsed Suspension Cylinder Detection......... 59
General Description of the Payload Cycle ......... 57
Off-Board Communication ................................. 59
TPS Off-Board Features........................................ 57
TPS On-Board Features........................................ 55
TPS Service Operation.......................................... 60
Payload Calibration ............................................ 60
Payload Configuration........................................ 60
Payload Show/Reset Resettable Totals ............. 61
Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes ...................... 157
Component Identifier (CID) .............................. 158
Failure Mode Identifier (FMI)............................ 160
Module Identifier (MID) .................................... 157
Troubleshooting Procedures ............................ 164
Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes Using Abbreviated
Procedure .......................................................... 164
Troubleshooting Electrical System Using Abbreviated
Procedures ........................................................ 502
Truck Payload - Calibrate....................................... 38
Truck Payload - Configure ..................................... 38
Truck Payload System (TPS) General Information.. 53
V
VIMS History ......................................................... 16
Hardware ........................................................... 16
Software............................................................. 16
W
Warning Operation ................................................ 39

2001 Caterpillar
All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi